Home

Kenwood C929 CD Player User Manual

1. 190 Deactivating the climate control SYSTEM csecccrseseceeeees 194 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode 194 Setting the temperature 195 Adjusting air distribution 196 Adjusting air volume 000008 197 Defrosting windshield 197 Maximum cooling MAX COOL 199 Air recirculation mode 664 199 Air CONCITIONING ccseeecceeeeeeees 200 Residual heat and ventilation 202 AUGIO SVSLCIN tai wemiienis Bienen oes 203 Audio and telephone operation 203 Operating Safety cceeccceeeeeeees 203 Operating and display elements 204 Button and soft key operation 206 Operation Gers odue iedewycadenvdevseveeseuewsieh 206 Radio operation ccseecceeeeeeees 209 Introduction to satellite radio USA ONIN ina a 214 CD MOIE scars coder tohderwscemiattotisncsneinss 219 GSM network phones 86 229 TDMA or CDMA network phones 236 Emergency calls 9117 0 eee 243 Power WINCOWS cccseeecceeeeseceseeeeeees 246 Opening and closing the WITICOW Sis sc ovivselssetewsgonanesecteevastewusee 246 synchronizing power windows 251 Retractable hardtop cccceeeceees 252 Opening and closing the retractable hardtop cccccees 252 Wind SCTECT saxecinciceaseceionsaeGiecwieaess 259 Driving SVSTCIIS wsccscascacesaveantivsssenssiaseny 26
2. Unlocking and opening the drivers door and or the trunk with the me chanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or Waon the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Removing the mechanical key P80 20 2672 31 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key gt Move locking tab Q direction of arrow gt Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing Unlocking the driver s door 1 Unlocking gt Insert the mechanical key into the driver s door lock until it stops gt Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to position Q The driver s door is unlocked Unlocking and opening the trunk A minimum height clearance of 5 78 ft 1 76 m is required to open the trunk lid The trunk lid lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess ri P80 20 2699 31 Trunk lid lock C Unlocking in an emergency Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Fully insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to position until it stops and simultaneously pull the trunk lid handle and lift lid Ea Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Turn the mechanical key back and re move it from the trunk lid lock Locking the vehicle If you cannot lock the vehicle with the Smart
3. cceeeeeeeeees 343 Tire and loading terminology 344 Rotating tires ccssescceseeeeeees 347 Winter driving 5 0 cu sintantaudecoesssarexnmnvedes 348 Winter tires ccsccceseceeeeeeeseeeees 348 Snow CMAING ircicssescscunoatwneseneears 349 Maintenance ccccssesccseecccessscees 350 Clearing the maintenance service indicator cceeeeeeeeeee sees 35 1 Maintenance service term exceeded cccccceesscccceseeceeeeees 351 Calling up the maintenance service indicator cceeeeeeeeeee ees 35 1 Resetting the maintenance service indicator ccceeeeeeeee sees 352 Vehicle CAVe cceeeccceessccceeseeceneeees 353 Cleaning and care of vehicle 353 Practical hints cece e 361 What to do if sa cccscsteerrevscsrcaninecennnns 362 Lamps in instrument cluster 362 Lamp in center console 367 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 06 368 Where will find vo ccecccceeeseeeeeees 388 First aid Kit ecccceseesceeeeeeeeeeees 388 Vehicle tool kit vehicle jack 388 Spare wheel with collapsible tire 391 Spare wheel bolts ceeeceeee 392 Unlocking locking in an emergency 394 Unlocking the vehicle 394 Locking the vehicle seeeee 395 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever automatic transmission 396 Opening closing in
4. Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately oN 7 minutes P80 35 2088 31 button USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Activating gt Press and hold button Q for at least 1 second Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed the SmartKey signaling range for the panic alarm is considerably reduced The panic alarm then only functions if the SmartKey is held in close proximity towards the antenna base Deactivating gt Press button Q again or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Safety and Security Panic alarm Safe
5. Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 326 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la bel The Certification Label can be found on the driver s door B pillar gt page 321 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 326 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if ap plicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is ten perc
6. After reset 5 758 m 1588 h 2 G 56 mph 21 4 mpg P54 32 2757 31 1 Statistics called up since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since last reset 4 Average speed since last reset Distance driven since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics manually gt Press and hold reset button until the values of the statistics are reset to 0 Resetting fuel consumption statistics automatically The values of the statistics will be automat ically reset to 0 when one of the following values exceeds e distance 100000 miles 100000 km e elapsed time 10000 hours Calling up range distance to empty gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu Press button J or Ref repeatedly until you see Range in the multifunc tion display In the multifunction display you will see the calculated range based on the cur rent fuel tank level Range 154 MI PS4 32 3118 31 TEL menu Warning A N A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the tele phone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic con ditions permit Some juri
7. viv Place bulb socket 3 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Press the new bulb into bulb socket Front turn signal bulb gt Turn bulb socket 2 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove gt Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket 2 gt Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 2 and turn it clockwise gt Place bulb socket 2 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 4 Press the new bulb into bulb socket Place bulb socket back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position RJ gt page 110 gt Open the trunk lid gt page 98 Tail lamp unit P54 395 2055 31 1 Bulb socket for rear fog lamp drivers side only 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for backup lamp Fold corresponding trim to side Turn the respective bulb socket coun terclockwise and remove Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb sock et Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise Reinstall the bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages Reinstall trim Practical hints Replacing b
8. If the retractable hardtop does not com pletely open or close the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered Warning e after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on e after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the hardtop is lowered a warning will sound In the multifunction dis play you will see and the message Retractable roof being opened Properly lock the retractable hardtop gt page 255 before continuing to drive Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be synchronized after the battery has been disconnect ed or discharged if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Controls in detail Power windows Each power window must be synchronized gt gt gt Close all doors Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Press and hold both switches 1 and 2 at the symbol EAN until the windows are completely closed Hold on to switches 4 and 2 for ap proximately 1 second The power windows are synchronized Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Opening and closing the retractable Ba hardtop A When opening and closing the retract able hardtop make sure Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it e there is sufficient clearance for the with you and lock the vehicle Do
9. Push cap down until it engages Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses Improper washer flu id can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps For more information see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 456 Vv Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information on tested and recommend ed rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice con cerning tire service and purchase Warning A N Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted e The wheel brakes or suspension compo nents can be damaged e The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct AN Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Warning When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can re sult in the bolts loosening and may lead to an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads Mercedes Benz therefore cannot assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used Operation Tire
10. The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order TEL rae G Hiller nae P54 32 2762 31 1 Selected name from phone book aD If you press and hold button Jag or BV for longer than 1 second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button N gt or gt Controls in detail Control system Press button F The control system dials the selected phone number e fthe connection is successful the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the display TEL 00 02 54 Miller e Ifno connection is made the con trol system stores the dialed num ber in the redial memory Cancel the call you have intended to make by pressing button fan Controls in detail Control system Redialing The control system stores the most recent ly dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu and the standby message in the multifunction display gt Press button F In the multifunction display you will see the first number in the redial memory TEL a 12125551212 7 P54 32 2765 31 or Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until the desired number or name ap pears in the multifunction display Press button F The control syst
11. To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual man ner Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territo ries and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap shoulder belt that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint man ufacturer of compliance with this stan dard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruc tion manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning A N Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger
12. 30 Nm Y Main Dimensions Model Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width Overall vehicle height Wheelbase Track front Track rear SLK 280 160 7 in 4082 mm 70 4 in 1788 mm 51 0 in 1296 mm 95 7 in 2430 mm 60 2 in 1530 mm 61 0 in 1549 mm SLK 350 160 7 in 4082 mm 70 4 in 1788 mm 51 1 in 1298 mm 95 7 in 2430 mm 60 1 in 1526 mm 61 0 in 1549 mm Technical data Main Dimensions SLK 55 AMG 160 9 in 4087 mm 70 6 in 1794 mm 50 0 in 1271 mm 95 7 in 2430 mm 60 0 in 1524 mm 61 0 in 1549 mm Technical data Weights Model Maximum roof load Maximum trunk load This vehicle is not designed to carry items on its roof Roof rails and any roof mounted devices unless express ly approved by Mercedes Benz for use on this vehicle model must not be used as they will damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop At time of printing Mercedes Benz does not offer any roof racks or any other roof mounted devices for use on this vehicle SLK 280 SLK 55 AMG SLK 350 110 Ib 50 kg 110 Ib 50 kg 220 Ib 100 kg 220 Ib 100 kg Ea This vehicle is not designed to carry any items on its trunk lid or accommo date any type of trunk lid rack or de vice Using such devices may damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop mechanism Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Y Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Vehicle components and thei
13. The current call is terminated The ap connection to the caller previously You will be notified of the second call kept on hold is also interrupted acoustically but you will not see this in however reconnection is indicated the display by an acoustic signal You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Placing a second call If you wish to place another call during an already active call you can place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that this feature is dependent on availability from your mobile phone service provider e Placing a second call gt Place a new call by entering telephone number manually gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted however reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal Combining two calls gt Press button The calls are combined into one call Terminating a combined call gt Press button The connection to both callers is terminated Emergency calls 911 The following describes how to dial a 911 emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes Benz specified mobile phone is inserted in the phone cradle Unless otherwise specified the de scriptions refer to
14. When you unlock your vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Disarming tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm switch off the tow away alarm feature be fore towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train The switch is located on the lower part of the center console 1 Indicator lamp 2 Tow away alarm deactivation switch gt Switch off the ignition gt page 36 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch You cannot disarm the tow away alarm while the ignition is switched on Safety and Security Anti theft systems gt Press tow away alarm deactivation switch 2 Indicator lamp in the tow away alarm deactivation switch comes on briefly gt Exit your vehicle gt Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm remains disarmed un til you lock your vehicle again Canceling tow away alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Manual transmission Automatic transmission Good visibility Climate control Automatic climate control Audio system Power windows Retractable hardtop Driving systems Use
15. tole MENEE In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may Warning A N escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water Getting started Adjusting If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or rearward hit from the front reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The exterior rear view mirror housing is now proper ly positioned and you can adjust the gt mirror normally The switches are located on the lower part o The memory function gt page 107 lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the set tings for the steering wheel and the driver s seat position Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Press switch 1 or
16. 12 277 S Safety belts see Seat belts Safety defects reporting 18 Safety occupant 64 Satellite radio USA only Seat belts 71 Cleaning 360 Fastening 47 Force limiter 74 Proper use of 49 73 Release button 49 Safety guidelines 68 Warning lamp 366 Seating capacity 322 Seats 104 Adjusting 38 Easy entry exit feature 43 Head restraint height 41 Heating 104 Power seats 40 Selective setting see SmartKey Selector lever lock 51 462 130 214 Service Information 12 Maintenance Booklet 12 Service and warranty Booklet 435 Information 10 Service life Tires 318 Service system Maintenance service indicator 350 Parts service 434 Settings menu Control system 134 Shelf behind roll bar 268 Shelf below rear window cleaning 360 Shift lock 462 Side marker lamps 401 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 345 SmartKey 92 Checking batteries 97 Factory setting 94 Global locking 95 Global unlocking 94 Locking and unlocking 92 Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key 97 Mechanical key 394 Panic button 80 Positions in starter switch 36 Power windows opening closing 249 Remote control 92 Replacing batteries 398 Restoring to factory setting 96 Retractable hardtop opening closing 257 Selective setting 95 Starting engine 50 Turning off engine 61 Unlocking the trunk lid 96 Snow chains 349 Spare fuses Vehicle tool kit 388 Spare parts see Parts service Spare wheel 391 SRS 73 462 Display message 372 Ind
17. A small convenience parcel net is located in the passenger footwell and behind the drivers seat It is for small and light items such as road maps mail etc Warning A N Do not place heavy or fragile objects or ob jects having sharp edges in the parcel net In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants Controls in detail Useful features Shelf behind roll bars Cup holder DER l p Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during hard braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident and be Warning Warning oe eae eae 6 A 6 A thrown around in the vehicle interior Ob The shelf behind the roll bars should not be In order to help prevent spilling liquids on Jace Unom Par i a meeror used to carry objects This will prevent such vehicle occupants and or vehicle equip may s A aai eoe O SSE el objects from being thrown around and injur ment only use containers that fit into the A ing vehicle occupants during an accident or cup holder Use lids on open containers and sudden maneuver do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident Liquids spilled on vehicle occu pants may cause serious personal injury Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warrant
18. By lining the seats with a proper H intermediate cover contact discoloration Do not use solvents like tar remover or will be prevented wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive Leather upholstery gt Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning per forated leather as its underside should not become wet Practical hints What to do if Where will find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if General information If any of the following lamps in the instru ment cluster fails to come on during the Lamps in instrument cluster bulb self check when switching on ignition gt page 36 have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary Problem Possible cause consequence The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The BAS and ESP are also switched off see mes sages in display Suggested solution The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while driving gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Read and observe messages in the The brake system is still functioning multifunc
19. Controls in detail Climate control The climate control is operational whenev er the engine is running The system cools or heats the interior depending on the se lected interior temperature and the cur rent outside temperature Warning A N When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro tected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance be tween unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribu tion controls page 179 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the interior through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 179 Warning A N Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Severe conditions e g strong air pollu tion may require replacement of the fil ter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air vol ume to the interior If the vehicle interior is ho
20. Do not place objects heavier than 20 Ibs 9 kg on the passenger seat This could cause the front air bag or head thorax air bag on the passenger side and with the seat belt fastened to secure the object the ETD to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle e Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child e Ensure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and infor mation on choosing an appropriate re straint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Safety and Security Occupant safety Infant and child restraint systems Use only a BabySmart compatible child restraint for the passenger seat in this vehicle We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion The passenger lap shoulder belt has a spe cial seat belt retractor for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child re straint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratch eting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack
21. For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Getting started Adjusting Head restraint gt Adjust the height of head restraints manually by pulling them upwards or pushing them downwards Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel Warning A N Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driv ing or driving without the steering wheel adjustment feature locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the electrical steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver s door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Steering wheel adjustmen
22. LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for ser vice The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Cus tomer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 lt is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next o
23. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operating instructions regarding use of an external antenna Warning A N Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A drivers attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop the vehicle before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Observe all legal requirements Only operate
24. Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol O ows 1 Display message wea err lateness Twi Si llel Ta mirror left wien SToMel 10 MAO 5 ele Puro ional front left Tien Sagine O te FOe Rear left turn signal Back up lamp on Rear right turn signal Back up lamp on Possible cause consequence You have forgotten to switch off the headlamps when exiting the vehicle and no SmartKey is in the starter switch The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working The right turn signal in the side mir ror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working The left front turn signal is malfunc tioning The right front turn signal is mal functioning The left rear turn signal is malfunc tioning A backup bulb has been brought into use The right rear turn signal is malfunc tioning A backup bulb has been brought into use Possible sol
25. Three red indicator lamps 2 on the re Level spective seat heating switch come on The switches are located on the upper part 3 Three indicator lamps on gt Press the seat heating switch repeat of the Se console highest level edly until the desired seat heating level is reached After approximately 5 minutes seat heating is automatically switched to level 2 2 Two indicator lamps on After approximately 10 minutes seat heating is automatically switched to level 1 1 One indicator lamp on 4 Seat heating switch driver s side lowest level 2 Indicator lamps After approximately 20 minutes seat heating is automatically switched to off off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Switching off seat heating gt Press the desired seat heating switch repeatedly until all indicator lamps on the seat heating switch go out If one or more of indicator lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The seat heating switch es off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as suffi cient voltage is available AIRSCARF neck level heating The AIRSCARF neck level heating provides the area surrounding the occupants necks with a heated air stream flowing from Openings in the head restraints The switches are located on the upp
26. WE To increase temperature on the left side Automatic climate control on off WE To increase temperature on the right side ayy Rear window defroster gt page 177 Air distribution control manual G Residual heat ventilation AC cooling on off Bg To lower temperature on the right side Bg 10 lower temperature on the left side Air recirculation Display OOQ 28 OOOO The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running You can operate the automatic climate control sys tem in either the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the inte rior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside tem perature Warning A N When operating the automatic climate con trol the air that enters the passenger com partment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set tem perature This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient dis tance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls gt page 192 to di rect the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unpro tected skin Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the interior through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage
27. a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approx 29000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should be sent to us not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA
28. avail able The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts The ESP has switched off The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP avail able Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident The display will clear after driving a short dis tance at more than 12 mph 20 km h gt Continue driving with added caution When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again vy If necessary have the generator and bat tery checked Practical hints What to do if Display message ESP SRS Transmis sion Display malfunction Visit workshop Restraint system malfunction Drive to workshop Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The ESP or the ESP display is mal functioning The SRS system is malfunctioning Vehicles with automatic transmis sion The provided operating safety of the automatic transmission is reduced Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Drive with added caution to
29. car washes without brushes are prefera the windshield gt page 357 This will er ble prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it be Waco S R fore running it through the automatic car wash When leaving the car wash make sure that the mirrors are folded out Other H wise they may vibrate Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to run ning the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to 0 gt page 56 Other wise the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintention ally This may lead to vehicle damage Operation Vehicle care Headlamps tail lamps side makers Cleaning the windows and the wiper turn signal lenses blades Warning A N pe E NA OET E SU EA For safety reasons switch off wipers and re n es ja The windshield wipers must be in a ver move SmartKey from starter switch before a d e a ae a tical position before folding them away cleaning the windshield Otherwise the wip T from the windshield They could other er motor could suddenly turn on and cause i injury Only use window cleaners that are suit Wise a MieOCm nae able for plastic lamp lenses Window Never open the hood when the wiper o cleaners which are not suitable may arms are folded forward gt Fold the wiper arms forward until it
30. ground with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been sta tionary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off with the engine not at operating tem perature the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper max mark 3 Lower min mark To check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick do the following v v Yy Open the hood gt page 307 Pull out oil dipstick 4 Wipe oil dipstick G clean Fully insert oil dipstick Q into the dipstick guide tube Operation Engine compartment gt Pull out oil dipstick Q again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain ac curate reading The oil level is correct when it is be tween the lower min mark and upper max mark 2 of oil dipstick The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2 1 US qt 2 0 I gt If necessary add engine oil For adding engine oil see Adding en gine oil gt page 312 For more information on engine oil see Fuels coolants lubricants etc gt page 449 For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 368 Operation Engine compartment Adding engine oil Only use approved engine oils and oil fil ters required for vehicles with Maint
31. gt page 101 Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic locking system With the automatic locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or MBM to the Vehicle submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see Automatic door lock in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Fron Automatic door lock On Off P54 32 2752 31 gt Press button or E to set the automatic central locking to On or Off Controls in detail Control system Convenience submenu Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a num ber of convenience features The following functions are available Function Page Activating easy entry exit 148 feature Setting parking position for 148 exterior rear view mirror Controls in detail Control system Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deacti vate the easy entry exit feature gt page 43 Warning A N You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To cancel steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering column lever gt page 43 e Press one o
32. no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 192 Warning uN Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Controls in detail Automatic climate control Severe conditions e g strong air pollu tion may require replacement of the fil ter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air vol ume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off The cli mate control will then adjust the interi or temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris When the retractable hardtop is closed do not obstruct air flow by placing ob jects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear window Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating the climate control Reactivating Operating the climate control system vere gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 P AUrOMATIE node oe gt Press button gt page 192 again Q Deactivating The previous settings are once again in When operating the climate control gt Press button age 192 i gt pag effect system in automatic mode you will The indicator lamp on the button r only rarely need to adjust the tempera comes on ture air volume and air distributi
33. or by pressing and holding the button on the climate control panel or automatic climate control panel the automatic rever sal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey gt page 249 or the retractable hardtop switch gt page 248 You can close and open the windows using the air recirculation switch in the control panel of the climate control page 185 or the automatic climate control gt page 199 With the SmartKey in starter switch position O or removed from the starter switch the door windows can be oper ated e until you open a door e for at least 5 minutes gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Opening the door windows gt Press and hold switch Q or at the symbol BJ to the resistance point The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch Closing the door windows gt Press and hold switch Q or at the symbol AN to the resistance point The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch Warning A N If you press and hold the switch when clos ing the window and upward move
34. the retractable hardtop switch The retractable hardtop switch is located on the lower part of the center console Retractable hardtop switch 1 Opening all side windows 2 Closing all side windows Warning A N Never operate the windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential dan ger the procedure can be immediately halt ed by releasing the retractable hardtop switch If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the windows using the re tractable hardtop switch the automatic re versal function will not operate gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Opening gt Push the retractable hardtop switch in quick succession twice in direction of arrow 1 All side windows open You can operate the rear side windows only by using the retractable hardtop switch Closing gt Push the retractable hardtop switch in quick succession twice in direction of arrow 2 Keep the retractable hardtop switch pushed the second time until all win dows are closed The windows in the driver s and pas senger door will close first followed by the rear side windows If the retractable hardtop is open only the windows in the driver s and passen ger door will close The rear side win dows remain open Controls in detail Power windows
35. through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the interior Warning A N Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 187 is activated or press button Keg Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Press button gt page 192 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode activates au tomatically at high outside tempera tures The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes gt gt Controls in detail Automatic climate control A Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Warning In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the closing of the door win dows can be immediately halted by releasing the button or by pressing the respective power window switch The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the button If you press button and keep it pressed the side windows will close The closing of the windows can be im mediate
36. to select the respective exterior rear view mirror The indicator lamp in the respective At low ambient temperatures the exte rior rear view mirrors will be heated au tomatically Before driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash fold the exterior mirrors in Otherwise they may get damaged of the center console 7 For more information see Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position parking aid gt page 108 switch comes on If you do not adjust the selected exterior rear view mirror by pressing adjustment switch 2 the indicator lamp in the switch will switch off automatically after approximately 10 seconds gt Press adjustment switch 2 forward rearward left or right according to the desired setting 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror 2 Adjustment switch 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror Y Driving Warning A N Do not lay any objects in the driver s foot well Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver s footwell have sufficient clear ance for the pedals During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate Fastening the seat belts Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sit
37. with radio frequency devices operating long as the button is pressed up to between 288 399 MHz 20 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased e Put anew battery in the hand held re mote control This will increase the a likelihood of the hand held remote con If you sell your vehicle erase the codes trol sending a faster and more accurate Of all three channels signal to the integrated remote control While performing step 3 hold the hand held remote control at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button or you are programming Attempt varying an gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances If another hand held remote control is available for the same device try the programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control before beginning the procedure Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals o Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control If you should experi ence further difficulties with program ming the integrated remote control contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 8
38. 2 and it gt page 178 to the fully open position Set air distribution control G gt page 182 to position IEJ The air distribution directs the air through the center and side air vents Set air volume control 2 gt page 183 to position 5 The ventilation operates with maximum blower speed Turn temperature controls 1 and 4 gt page 179 completely counterclock wise to their end stops The lowest temperature for both sides is set When the vehicle s interior has cooled down enough reduce the air volume and increase the air temperature to comfortable settings if desired Residual engine heat utilization With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine Controls in detail Climate control Activating Deactivating gt Switch off the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button gt page 179 again gt Press button gt page 179 The indicator lamp on the button goes The indicator lamp on the button ou comes on The residual heat is automatically How long the system will provide heat eee ON ing depends on e when the ignition is switched on gt page 36 e the coolant temperature e the temperature set by the operator e after about 30 minutes The blower will run at speed setting 1 DEAR PAREN Olde ahs regardless of the air d
39. 27 1 for electric air pump operation Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 gt page 36 Press on electric air pump switch 8 The electric air pump should now switch on and inflate the tire Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 6 minutes without interrup tion Otherwise it may overheat You may operate the air pump again af ter it has cooled off After 5 minutes the pressure gauge must display at least 26 psi 1 8 bar The air hose can become hot during inflation Please exercise appropriate caution gt If this tire inflation pressure is not at tained turn off the electric air pump detach the filler hose from the tire valve and drive vehicle back and forth very slowly approximately 30 ft 10 m This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire Unscrew the air pump s air hose G from flange of the TIREFIT contain er Screw air hose onto tire valve 7 Inflate the tire again A If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi 1 8 bar is not attained tire is too severely damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair Warning In this case TIREFIT cannot properly seal the tire Do not drive the vehicle Contact the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance gt After attaining a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi 1 8 bar press O on electric air pump switch 8 The electric air pump should
40. 3 Cancel cruise control 4 Resume to last set speed Warning A N Cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded The brake pedal is depressed automatically to do this Keep in mind that cruise control is a conve nience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the ve hicle s speed and for safe braking operation Keep driver s foot area clear at all times in cluding the area under the brake pedal Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system Do not place your foot under the brake pedal your foot could become caught Controls in detail Driving systems Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Briefly lift or depress 2 the cruise control lever gt page 261 The current speed is set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The cruise control is activated The selected speed appears in the multi function display Controls in detail Driving systems On uphill or downhill grades the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed On downhill grades the cruise control maintains the set speed with braking from the vehicle s braking system In addition on longer downhill grades t
41. 31 Press button or E to set the function to On or Off Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Egy before turning off the en gine gt page 55 Controls in detail Control system You can temporarily deactivate the de layed shut off feature gt Before exiting the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 gt Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0 The delayed shut off feature is deacti vated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether or not the interior lighting remains lit during darkness for approximately 10 seconds after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button JM or keg repeatedly until you see Interior lighting delayed shut off in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting gt Interior lighting delayed shut off On Of f P54 32 3347 31 Press button or E to set the function to On or Off Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu Use the Vehicle sub menu to make general vehicle settings The following function is available Function Page Setting automatic locking 147 For additional information on central lock ing see Automatic central locking
42. BA The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons Jj to MQ on the radio unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE briefly gt Press button The call will be made Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons Jj to MQ on the radio unit gt Press desired button EEN to EE until the call is made Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function If you have activated the automatic re dial function on your mobile telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instruc tions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial hg TERLE PES LL MUM RCU P82 60 4621 31 gt Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button WW or BA The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left hand corner of the disp
43. Center Fuel consumption is also increased by driv ing in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Drinking and driving Warning A N Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina tions Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgment The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac cident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Operation Driving instructions Pedals Warning A N Keep driver s foot area clear at all times Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement Power assistance Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Operation Driving instructions Brakes Warning A N After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components or salty road conditions the first braking ac tion may be somewhat reduced and in creased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Resting your foot on the brake ped
44. Digital soeedome Operate the CD Time Date Call up range Redialing ter outside tem player submenu perature Call up mainte Lighting E nance service submenu indicator Check engine oil Vehicle submenu level SLK 55 AMG Ganvenicnce only submenu The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored Controls in detail Control system Standard display menu The following functions are available Checking coolant temperature The multifunction display shows the main Function Page pees E odometer and trip odometer This default Run Flat Indicator 329 ne ad EaR o BZA repeatediy setting is referred to as the standard dis aaa N E 128 y l l p play 8 p in the multifunction display Display digital soeedometer or 129 outside temperature E 26753 Q 40 80 120 C Calling up maintenance service 350 miles indicator F 149 6 72 Checking engine oil level 309 AAAS LAEN P54 32 2743 31 SLK 55 AMG onl l y During severe operating conditions e g stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C 1 Main odometer 2 Trip odometer If another display is shown instead of the The engine should not be operated with a standard display coolant temperature above 248 F gt Press button or repeatedly 120 C Doing so may cause serious en until you see the standard display gine damage which is not covered by the gt Press button EB
45. E S oro WEES a amp Oe NC e Qo Item Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left side air vent Left side air vent adjustable Fixed air vent for defrosting left side window Left center air vent fixed Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed adjustable left center air vents Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed adjustable right center air vents Right center air vent fixed Fixed air vent for defrosting right side window Right side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable right side air vent Item 3 Climate control panel When you turn the thumbwheels and upwards to the first stop the fixed center air vents 4 and 9 and the adjustable center air vents and 7 are open When you turn the thumbwheels com pletely upwards only the adjustable center air vents 6 and 7 are open For draft free ventilation move the slid ers for the center air vents and 7 to the middle position Qo HAA Gye Controls in detail Climate control Item Temperature control left side Air volume control climate control on off Air distribution control Temperature control right side a Rear window defroster gt page 177 Ker Front defroster AC cooling on off Residual heat ventilation Air recirculation
46. Hold the vehicle with the brake When working on the vehicle set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away When you stop longer with the engine idling and or on a hill gt Set the parking brake gt Move the gear selector lever to position P Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes vy Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console Q Program mode selector switch C Comfort S Sport For comfort driving For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 158 Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted gt Controls in detail Automatic transmission Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display Select C for comfort driving e The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and rev
47. Opening and closing the windows with the SmartKey The retractable hardtop gt page 252 will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey 24681 gt Aim transmitter eye at the outside driver s or passenger door handle The SmartKey must be in close proxim ity to the respective outside door han dle Controls in detail Power windows Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold button E The windows and retractable hardtop begin to open after approximately 1 second In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation Release button on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure Closing Convenience closing feature gt Press and hold lock button EAN The windows and retractable hardtop begin to close after approximately 1 second In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation Release button on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure Warning A N When closing the side windows and retract able hardtop make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure If potential danger exists proceed as fol lows e Release button to stop the closing procedure To open press and hold button gi To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure press and hold button eg A
48. Vehicle tool kit 388 Lifting vehicle 413 Lowering vehicle 419 Jump starting 424 K Key 209 Kickdown Automatic transmission 162 459 Kilopascal 345 Kneebag see Air bags L Labels 436 Lamp in center console 367 Lamps in instrument cluster 362 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 362 Battery SmartKey 95 Brakes 363 CHECK ENGINE 364 ESP 84 86 365 Fuel reserve 365 366 Passenger front air bag off 367 Seat belts 366 SRS 64 65 366 Language in multifunction display Control system 137 Layout of poly V belt drive 437 License plate lamps 401 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 358 Technical data 441 442 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting 110 Combination switch 114 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 115 Daytime running lamp mode 112 Door entry lamps 119 Exterior lamp switch 110 Exterior lamps cleaning 357 Foglamps 113 Footwell lighting 118 Hazard warning flasher 117 Headlamp mode automatic manual 111 High beam 115 High beam flasher 115 Individual settings Control system 143 Instrument cluster illumination 120 Interior lighting 117 Low beam headlamps 110 Night security illumination Control system 145 Reading lamps 119 Standing lamps 110 Trunk 118 Limp Home Mode Automatic transmission 172 Line of fall 460 Loading 265 320 344 Loading the vehicle 320 Locator lighting Control system 144 Locking And parking 59 Centrally Control system 147 Centrally from inside 102 Lock
49. Wag for next display B for previous display Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Pressing any of the buttons on the multi function steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display are arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under Audio for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being ar ranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or re peatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e If you press button EAN or eg re peatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu In the Settings menu you will find a number of submenus instead of functions for calling up and changing settings For in structions on using these submenus see Settings menu gt page 134 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not neces sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first
50. Wheel wrench Vehicle tool kit 388 Wheels see Tires Wheels tightening torque 419 Where will find 2 388 Wind screen 259 463 Windows see Power windows Windshield Washer fluid reservoir 315 Washer system 456 Windshield wipers 56 Replacing wiper blades 406 Wiper blades cleaning 357 Winter driving 348 Instructions 299 Snow chains 349 Tires 348 Winter tires see Tires Wood trims cleaning 360 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrat
51. When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury The switches are located on the upper part of the center console 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2 If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch e while in the selective remote con trol mode only the door opened from inside is unlocked e while in the global remote control mode the vehicle is unlocked com pletely when a door is opened from the inside Locking gt Press central locking switch Q If all doors are closed the vehicle locks Unlocking gt Press central unlocking switch The vehicle unlocks Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Controls in detail Seats For information on seat adjustment see Red indicator lamps 2 onthe seat heating Switching on seat heating Adjusting gt page 38 switch show which heating level you have gt Press the desired seat heating switch selected Seat heating
52. an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Air bags and emergency tensioning de vices ETDs are designed to function on a one time only basis An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or re moving any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub passenger air bag cover out board sides of the seat backrests door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of additional electri cal electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purses umbrellas etc Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide ade quate protection Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an autho rize
53. an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants Roadside Assistance button Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button Bq gt Open center armrest cover gt page 266 gt Press and hold the button for longer than 2 seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt Describe the nature of the need for as sistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may ap ply Refer to the Roadside Assistance man ual for more information The following is only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehic
54. an emergency 397 Raising retractable hardtop manually ss cetceaseshansancenanasaenuronnantents 397 Replacing SmartKey batteries 398 SmartKey sicncesaccucgnederengsnssscvensennents 399 BUD oaa ecanestnancutayecenwucseuss 401 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 403 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 405 Replacing wiper blades 00668 406 Removing wiper blades 406 Installing wiper blades 407 IGT TI pecan neaundeedtasicecteuameionnimuarenheteon 408 Preparing the vehicle 06 408 Sealing tires with TIREFIT 408 Mounting the spare wheel 412 DANCI Y oer Ea 421 Disconnecting the battery 422 Removing the battery 08 422 Charging and reinstalling battery 423 Reconnecting the battery 423 Jump starting siensansescasneseiiorsdeuuseeanetars 424 Towing the Vehicle cccccssseeeeeeees 426 Installing towing eye bolt 428 FSS T E E T T 430 Aids for replacing fuses 430 Main fuse box in passenger Compartment cceecseeeceeeceeeees 431 Fuse box in engine compartment 432 Technical data ccccccceeeeeees 433 Parts service sseseseeeseceseceseeessersseess 434 Warranty coverage ceccccseescceeeeeeees 435 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 006 435 Identification labels cccceeeceeeeee
55. by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and be come visible at a tread depth of approxi mately in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread A Although the applicable federal motor vehi cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI be come visible at approximately Veg in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not al low your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches We in 3 0 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Warning Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subject to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temper atures Operation Driving instructions Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Hydroplaning_ Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and
56. chart and remedied by an authorized Wercedec Bane Canter The fuse chart is located in the main fuse box in the passenger compartment gt page 431 The amperages of the fuses are also given there The following aids are available to help you replace fuses T e Fuse chart Keep the fuse boxes free by contamina tion and wetness Otherwise electrical Spare fuses e Spare fuses parts or systems could be damaged Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well gt page 388 e Fuse extractor The electrical fuses are located in different Warning A N fuse boxes Fuse extractor e Main fuse box in passenger compart The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle ment gt page 431 Only use fuses approved by Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system tool kit in the spare wheel well in question Using other fuses may causean Fuse box in engine compartment gt page 388 overload and leading to a fire and or cause gt page 432 damage to electrical components and or systems Main fuse box in passenger Opening compartment gt Open the driver s door gt Insert flat blunt object as a lever into recess on the edge of cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow gt Loosen cover Q from dashboard using the lever gt Using your hands pull cover Q out and remove 1 Main fuse box cover Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open t
57. control malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Cruise control Drive to workshop Possible cause consequence Possible solution The ABS has detected a malfunction gt Continue driving with added caution and has switched off The ESP and Wheels may lock during hard braking the BAS are also deactivated reducing steering capability The brake system is still functioning gt Have the system checked at an authorized normally but without the ABS avail Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible able Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident The ABS or the ABS display is mal gt Continue driving with added caution functioning Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Cruise control is malfunctioning gt Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Display message ESP malfunction Visit workshop unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction The ABS might not be operational The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP avail able The self diagnosis has not been com pleted The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP
58. coolant to cool gt Check the coolant level and add cool ant if necessary gt page 313 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under any cir cumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the e Major assemblies e Fuel system e Engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A N Vehicles with manual transmission Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re moving the SmartKey from the starter switch The vehicle cannot be steered when the SmartKey is removed Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle a
59. deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 84 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Refuel at the next gas station gt page 304 After refueling you will see the message 1 message in the multifunction display gt Press reset button to confirm the message gt page 24 Practical hints What to do if Problem W The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp flashes after starting the engine The red seat belt telltale comes on after starting the engine with all doors closed The red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning signal with increasing inten sity for a maximum of 60 seconds when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h FESS The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving Warning A N In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The fuel cap is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap The seat belt telltale reminds you gt Fasten your seat belts gt page 7 1 and your passenger to fasten your seat belts before driving off You and or your passenger have gt Fasten your seat belts gt page 7 1 forgotten to fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the pas Pb Remove the items from the passenger seat senger seat and therefore the sys and put them in a s
60. device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment You can also open and close the retractable hardtop using the SmartKey gt page 257 Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button Ep All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs on the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed gt page 87 The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of un locking if e neither door nor trunk is opened e the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch e the central locking switch is not activated Global locking gt Press button eg With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed now gt page 87 If the turn si
61. driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency Until that time you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break in period Warning Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition mes sages in the multifunction display Especial ly for high performance driving it is important to maintain the brake system and have it checked regularly Operation Driving instructions Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the oper ating temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex tended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Simultaneously depressing the acceler ator pedal and applying the brake re duces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Parking Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as th
62. e cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven Warning A N Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under Ye in 3 mm Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approx imately 1 46 in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Recommended minimum tire tread depth e Summer tires g in 3 mm e Winter tires Me in 4 mm Warning A N Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately Wine in 1 6 mm we recom mend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread
63. fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat tery of another vehicle Observe the follow ing e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic convert er are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12V Jump start ing with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps e Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or oth er parts that move when an engine Is started or running Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at tempts Do not attempt to start the engine us ing a battery quick charge unit If the engine does not run after s
64. from the engine Power train Collective term designating all compo nents used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles includ ing e Engine e Clutch torque converter e Transmission e Transfer case e Drive shaft e Differential e Axle shafts axles Production options weight gt page 345 Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmis sion between standard operation S and comfort operation C Vehicles with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program in addition to S and C for regular S or comfort C operation see above you can use M for manual shift pro gram Pounds per square inch gt page 345 Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 345 REST Residual engine heat utilization Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehi cle interior for a short time after the en gine has been turned off Restraint systems Seat belts belt tensioners air bags and child restraint systems As inde pendent systems their protective func tions complement one another Rim gt page 345 Retractable hardtop Hardtop that can be opened and closed at the push of a button and stored in the trunk Roll bar Occupant protection system which consists of tubular steel sheathed in plastic RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It
65. function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in Controls in detail Control system SLK 55 AMG The steering wheel in this vehicle will vary from steering wheel shown How ever multifunction steering wheel sym bols and feature description apply to AMG vehicles as well Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table below provides an overview of through the menus the individual menus of After start 75 MI 1 30 h HALI aff 58 mph 21 4 mpg Settings To reset Press 1 message reset button for 3 seconds P54 32 3349 31 Controls in detail Control system Menus submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu Menu 4 Menu Menu 6 Menu 7 Standard display AUDIO NAV Vehicle status Settings Trip computer TEL message memory gt page 128 gt page 129 gt page 132 gt page 132 gt page 134 gt page 149 gt page 151 Run Flat Indicator Select radio Show route Call up vehicle Reset to factory Fuel consump Load phone book station guidance in malfunction settings tion statistics structions warning and after start Check coolant Select satellite SUEN direc system status Instrument clus Fuel consump Search for name 5 temperature radio station tiOn traveled messages ter submenu tion statistics in phone book USA only Sree in since last reset memory
66. fuses Vehicle tool kit 388 G Garage door opener 281 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 344 Gear range Automatic transmission 160 459 Limiting 160 Shifting into optimal 164 Gear selector lever Automatic transmission 157 Position 157 159 Global locking unlocking see SmartKey Global Positioning System see GPS Glove box 266 Good visibility 173 GPS 87 88 459 Tele Aid system 273 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GSM network phones Telephone 229 GVW 344 GVWR 345 H Hard plastic trim items cleaning 359 Hazard warning flasher 117 Head restraint height Seats 41 Headlamps Bi Xenon 401 457 Cleaning system 173 315 456 Night security illumination Control system 145 Switching off 60 Switching on 55 Headliner cleaning 360 Head thorax airbag 71 459 Heating Seats 104 Steering wheel 288 High beam Flasher 115 Headlamps 55 115 Headlamps bulbs 401 High mounted brake lamp 401 High performance brake system SLK 55 AMG 295 Hood 307 Horn 23 Hydroplaning 297 l Identification labels see Labels Ignition Position in starter switch 36 Immobilizer see Anti theft systems Infant and child restraint systems 75 Instrument cluster 25 120 459 Clock 122 Lamps indicator and warning 362 Overview 24 Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior rear view mirror see Mirrors Intermittent interval wiping see Wind shield wipers J Jack
67. help reduce the likelihood and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag passenger air bag kneebags head thorax air bags and ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted oc cupants in certain frontal front air bags kneebags and EDT and side head tho rax air bags and EDT impacts which ex ceed preset deployment thresholds Safety and Security Occupant safety Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a crash your body would move too far forward That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could se verely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects gt gt b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash
68. if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Operation At the gas station Refueling Warning VAN Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious inju ry Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could result in personal injury The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks and un locks the fuel filler flap 1 To open fuel filler flap 2 To insert fuel filler cap 3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure information Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump For more information on gasoline see Premium unleaded gasoline gt page 452 or the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Open fuel filler flap by pushing at point indicated by arrow Q The fuel filler flap springs open Turn fuel filler cap counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure i
69. in detail Control system Selecting radio station gt Switch on the radio gt page 209 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to the separate operating instruc tions gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display C FM A 161 1F O V 1 Waveband setting 2 Tuned station gt Press button EAN or Red repeatedly until the desired station is found P54 32 3119 31 You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio gt page 212 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to the separate operating instructions Selecting satellite radio station USA only The Sirius satellite radio is treated as a radio application gt Select satellite radio with the corre sponding soft key SAT in the radio menu G saT 2 6 eo P54 32 3120 31 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Channel name or number gt Press button JM or ed repeatedly until the desired channel is found For more information on satellite radio operation see Introduction to satellite radio USA only gt page 214 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions Operating the CD player gt Switch on the radio and select the CD player gt page 222 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to the separate operating instruc tions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played
70. information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance cceceecececsceceececs 12 Roadside Assistance 0 e008 12 Change of address or ownership 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada 13 Where to find It ccccccccceeeessseeees 14 DV INTO IS PE sede secsiemieinbees 15 Operating Safety ceccccccssssecceeeeeeees 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 6 17 Reporting safety defects c ee 18 Reporting safety defects 18 Vehicle data recording csseccceeees 19 Information regarding electronic recording CeVICES ccceseeeenes 19 At a glance 0 0 ccc ccccccccesseeeeeeeeeeees 21 COCK DI iienaa 22 Instrument CluSter sesccccsessseees 24 Multifunction steering wheel 26 Center console ccccceseccceeecccseeees 28 Upper part cccccsssscccesscceseeees 28 Lower part ssvescvndavuvianvaventanetentoudecteds 29 Overhead control panel cee 30 Door control panel ccsssecceeseeeeees 31 Getting started eeeeceeees 33 LITO KMS cessen 34 Unlocking with the SmartKey 34 Starter switch positions 606 36 PRONG FINS pispisat EER 38 DOS cetera a 38 Steering wheel cccscccesesseeeeees 42 IVINENO S ecaat
71. inserting a new CD Inserting a second CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will cause dam age to the CD drive not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read WRONG CDO will appear in the display Ejecting a CD gt Make sure the system is switched on gt Press EW button The system ejects the CD Remove CDO will appear in the display gt Remove CD from slot With the CD removed NO CD will appear in the display If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx 15 seconds the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it If a CD is pulled back in press WW button the CD will then be ejected Operational readiness of CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the vehicle it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system The CD changer is located in the glove box Pa 60 4345 31 1 CD loading slot 2 Magazine slot button A magazine is integrated into the CD changer as a fixed element It holds a max imum of six CDs The CD changer features six magazine slot buttons 2 for controlling the loading pro cedure A light emitting diode in the buttons shows the status of the corresponding magazine slot CD loading slot 4 is above buttons 2 and is used to load CDs LEDs no LED is lit Magazine slot is empty green LED flashes CD can be loaded red LED is lit
72. is driven cautiously somewhat longer Operation Tires and wheels Do not continue driving in emergency mode if you notice knocking sounds the vehicle starts to shake smoke develops and you smell rubber ESP is intervening continuously you notice tears on the tire sidewalls After driving in emergency mode you must have the rims inspected by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to check if they are suitable for further use The failed tire must be replaced in any case When replacing individual or all tires on the vehicle make sure only tires marked with MOExtendea are mount ed in the size specified for your vehicle gt page 439 Operation Tires and wheels Tire labeling Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires P40 10 3561 31 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 341 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 339 3 Maximum tire load gt page 340 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 341 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material gt page 343 7 Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 334 Load identification gt page 338 9 Tire name For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from d
73. is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking The average of both the gt MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Shift lock When the vehicle with automatic trans mission is parked this lock prevents the gear selector lever from being inad vertently moved out of position P with out the SmartKey turned and the brake pedal depressed Sidewall gt page 345 SRS Supplemental Restraint System Seat belts emergency tensioning device and air bags Though indepen dent systems they are closely inter faced to provide effective occupant protection Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response automatic and man ual emergency Roadside Assistance and information Tele Aid is initially ac tivated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquain tance call The Tele Aid system is operational pro vided that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not dam aged and cellular and GPS coverage is available Tightening torque Force times lever arm e g a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened TIN Tire Identification Number gt page 346 Tire load rating gt page 346 Tire ply composition and material used gt page 346 Tire speed rating gt page 346 Tracti
74. its last set position when you e close the drivers door with the ignition switched on or e insert the SmartKey into the starter switch with the driver s door closed The last set steering wheel position is stored when e the ignition is switched off e the position is stored in memory page 107 With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the drivers door with the SmartKey in starter switch position O or 1 If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated The adjustment procedure is briefly in terrupted when the engine is started Getting started Adjusting Mirrors Interior rear view mirror Warning A N Adjust the interior and exterior rear view P AOUSTIN NSCOR TEAN MIENINGEN Let the system complete the adjustment mirrors before driving so that you have a manta procedure before setting the vehicle in mo good view of the road and traffic condi For more information see Rear view mir tion All steering wheel adjustment must be tions rors gt page 173 completed before setting the vehicle in mo tion Driving off with the steering wheel still Exterior rear view mirrors nate Warning A N adjusting could cause the driver to lose con
75. km h with the recommended tire inflation pres sure gt gt Practical hints Flat tire pare p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Mounting the spare wheel Warning A N Center as soon as possible to obtain a new TIREFIT kit Follow recommend inflation pressures Warning A N gt Bring used TIREFIT materials to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for proper disposal Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc The dimensions of the spare wheel with col lapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle han tured or damaged by road debris potholes l a etc Warning A N dling characteristics change when driving aes with a spare wheel with collapsible tire Po norunoenniate ures on entat a me Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph mounted Adapt your driving style accord wear unevenly adversely affect handling 80 km h A TIREFIT repair is not designed ingly and fuel economy and are more likely to fail to operate at higher speeds from being overheated The spare wheel with collapsible tire is for r E TE The sticker must be attached on the instru temporary use only When driving with spare o ene me Hiss y ee z ment cluster where it will be easily seen by wheel with collapsible tire mounted ensure SOSEINIEe vanie l Cejpek Wei PS IMEE the driver proper tire
76. lowing message will appear Turn on ignition to see engine oil level gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 If you see the message Observe waiting time gt If engine is at operating temperature wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure gt If engine is not at operating tempera ture yet you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil If you see the message Engine oil level Not when engine on gt Turn off the engine gt If the engine is at operating tempera ture wait 5 minutes before checking oil gt If the engine is not at operating temperature yet you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil If you want to interrupt the checking procedure press button BVA or Ba on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 124 If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature the following message will appear Engine oil level Reduce oil level gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For more information on messages in the display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 368 Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick SLK 280 SLK 350 only When checking the oil level the vehicle must be parked on level
77. menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after 149 start Fuel consumption statistics 150 since last reset Calling up range distance to 151 empty When you enter the trip computer menu you will always see the fuel consumption statistics after start first Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption statistics after start gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu gt Press button JM or Red repeatedly until you see After start in the multi function display After start 1 30 h 2 P54 32 2756 31 1 Statistics called up since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average speed since start Distance driven since start Controls in detail Control system I All statistics stored since the last en gine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Fuel consumption since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu gt Press button JM or eg repeatedly until you see After reset in the multi function display
78. mination The locator lighting and the night security Warning A N illumination are described in the Control system section see gt page 144 and In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions gt page 145 only switch from position Rg to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from Rg to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Controls in detail Lighting Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in con junction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allow able lamp operation Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position WA To switch on the fog lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to position first Controls in detail Lighting Front fog lamps gt Switch on the low beam headlamps page 110 gt With the exterior lamp switch in the low beam headlamp position pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop The front fog lamps switch on The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 110 gt Push in the exterior lamp switch The front fog lamps switch off The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out Rear fog lamp driver s side only gt gt Switch on the fr
79. now be switched off gt Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to position O gt page 36 gt Detach the electric air pump The air hose may still be hot Please ex ercise appropriate caution gt Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the electrical air pump back in the trunk Close the trunk lid Drive off immediately The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself evenly inside the tire A Warning Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at higher speeds The sticker must be attached on the instru ment cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver Vehicle handling characteristics may change Adapt your driving accordingly gt After driving the vehicle for an initial 10 minutes check the tire inflation pressure using pressure gauge 9 on the air pump Practical hints Flat tire A If tire inflation pressure has fallen below 20 psi 1 3 bar do not continue to drive the vehicle Warning Park your vehicle safely away from the road way and contact the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or Roadside Assistance If tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi 1 3 bar inflate tire to correct pres sure see placard on the driver s door B pillar and drive vehicle to nearest tire re pair facility to have tire repaired or replaced Recommended duration of use 300 miles 500 km at 50 mph 80
80. on the AIRSCARF switch are flashing there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The AIRSCARF neck lev el heating switches off automatically The AIRSCARF neck level heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available Y Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat back rest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head re straint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags for proper seat positioning gt page 65 In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach operation and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small chil dren should be seated in a properly se cured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 255 and Canadian Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the outer side of the respective seat Driver and passenger seat e Seat and backrest position Driver only e Steering wheel position e Exterior rear view mirrors A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause th
81. or closed Adjusting air volume Ten blower speeds are available gt Use air volume control 2 gt page 179 to adjust the air volume Controls in detail Climate control Basic settings Heating winter gt Turn temperature controls and gt page 179 to the desired position gt Turn air volume control 2 gt page 179 to level 2 or higher Otherwise the windows may fog over gt Turn air distribution control gt page 179 to a position between and EFM Open the side air vents if necessary Close the center air vents Controls in detail Climate control Heating summer gt Turn air temperature control 4 and 4 gt page 179 to the desired position Turn air volume control 2 gt page 179 to level 1 or higher Turn air distribution control gt page 179 to position EEJ Open the center and side air vents Defrosting windshield You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the side windows Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again Activating gt Press button Keg gt page 179 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches automatically to the following func tions e cooling on to dehumidify e maximum blowing and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the fro
82. or BAW to select Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty the functions in the standard display I O menu Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display gt page 376 Warning A N e Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the car and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Displaying digital speedometer or outside temperature gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until you see the digital soeedometer The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display 55 mph P54 32 2736 31 You can select either the display of the digital speedometer or the outside temperature indicator gt page 138 Controls in detail Control system AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently switched on the message AUDIO off is shown in the multifunction display The following functions are available Function Page Selecting radio station 130 Selecting satellite radio 130 station USA only Operating the CD player 131 Controls
83. position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow Adjusting steering column up or down 1 Adjusting steering column in or out 2 Adjusting steering column up or down gt Move the lever in direction of l ee arrows 2 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Make sure your legs can move freely and all the displays including malfunc tion and indicator lamps on the instru ment cluster are clearly visible or gt Open the drivers door Getting started Adjusting Easy entry exit feature This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle The easy entry exit feature can be activat ed or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system gt page 147 Getting started Adjusting A You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated Warning To cancel steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering column lever gt page 43 e Press one of the memory position but tons or the memory button M gt page 107 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel will return to
84. press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction or gt Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel page 167 The transmission shifts to the next higher gear If instead of the manual program mode symbol M the symbol appears in the multifunction display gt page 158 shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevwving Controls in detail Automatic transmission Downshifting Kickdown Using the kickdown when driving in the Warning A N manual program mode M is not possible On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction or 5 L Briefly press button 4 on the left side of the steering wheel gt page 167 The transmission shifts to the next lower gear When you brake or stop the transmis sion shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off Controls in detail Automatic transmission Deactivating manual shift program gt Press the program mode selector switch gt page 169 repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display or gt Restart the engine The transmission will go to
85. recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps pre vent overheating of the brakes and re duces brake pad wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately park so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster High performance brake system SLK 55 AMG only The high performance brake system is de signed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required to accommo date the performance capabilities of the vehicle The brakes may produce a squeak ing type noise depending on the e vehicle speed e brake force applied e ambient conditions e g temperature and humidity As with any brake system the wear of indi vidual brake system components such as brake pads or discs strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle Thus a driv ing style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle s brakes to wear more quickly Operation Driving instructions A New vehicle brake pads and discs and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of
86. safety precautions in this manual the Technical data section gt page 433 in this manual the traffic rules and regulations the motor vehicle laws and safety stan dards AN Various labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning la bels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Removal of any of these labels may cause you and oth ers to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or personal injury Warning Introduction Problems with your vehicle Y Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturer
87. seconds after you shifted out of re verse gear R e immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph 10 km h e immediately when you press adjust ment switch 2 Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors Warning A N The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving Do not use the vanity mirror while driving Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others gt Swing sun visors down when you expe rience glare gt To use mirror and switch on mirror lamp lift up mirror cover 1 Mirror lamp 2 Mounting 3 Mirror cover 4 Sun visor If sunlight enters through a side win dow disengage sun visor from mounting 2 and pivot it to the side You then can slide the sun visor along the pivot arm to a different position if so desired The mirror lamp Q will switch off as soon as sun visor is disengaged from mounting 2 Close mirror cover 3 if open before you disengage the sun visor 4 from mounting 2 and pivot it to the side Rear window defroster Switching on gt Press the rear window defroster switch EEA in the control panel of the climate control gt page 179 or the au tomatic climate control gt page 192 The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defrost er as soon as the rear w
88. service A The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service ranging from Service A approx 1 hour to Service H approx 8 hours Service A in 356 miles amp P54 32 2759 31 Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS Flexible Service System PLUS only Canada vehicles The interval be tween maintenance services depends on your driving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short distance trips will lengthen the interval between mainte nance services Clearing the maintenance service indicator The maintenance service indicator is auto matically cleared after 30 seconds You can also clear it yourself gt Press reset button gt page 25 for clearing the maintenance service indi cator The maintenance service indicator is cleared and the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 128 Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested main tenance service term you will see the fol lowing message in the multifunction display Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles km Service A exceeded by XXX days Service A exceeded by X day In addition a signal sounds when the mes sage appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will reset the mainten
89. spare wheel rim 2 Vehicle tool kit under collapsible tire 3 Retaining screw gt Loosen retaining screw by turning it counterclockwise Remove spare wheel 1 Take off the wheel bolts for spare wheel 1 Storing the spare wheel with collapsible tire If you wish to store the spare wheel after use carry out the following steps Other wise the spare wheel will not fit the storage compartment Make sure the collapsible tire is dry when storing It gt Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the collapsible tire gt Take the valve extractor from the vehi cle tool kit gt page 388 gt Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and allow the air to escape It may take a few minutes for the col lapsible tire to deflate completely Practical hints Where will I find Screw the valve insert back into the valve Screw the valve cap back on the valve Pull the protective wrap provided with the vehicle tool kit over the spare wheel Store the spare wheel and the valve ex tractor in the storage compartment un derneath the trunk floor Pierce the protective wrap with retain ing screw Secure the spare wheel by turning re taining screw 8 clockwise Practical hints Where will I find In case of a flat tire you may temporarily Spare wheel bolts Warning AN use the spare wheel with collapsible tire aaa when Observing the following restrictions The dimen
90. the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For information on driving with MOExtended tires see MOExtended system gt page 333 Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimen tal effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimensional variations and dif ferent tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehi cle may be the result Technical data Rims and tires Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A placard with the recommended tire inflation pres sures is located on the driver s door B pillar Some vehicles may have sup plemental tire inflation pressure infor mation for driving at high speeds page 328 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con dition gt page 328 If such information is provided it can be found on the plac ard located on the inside of the fuel fill er flap The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s mainte nance recommendation included with vehicle Technical data Rims and tires The following pages also list the ap proved wheel rim and tire s
91. the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System or audio sys tem if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second You can take and place telephone calls us ing the buttons and on the mul tifunction steering wheel Use the control system for performing other telephone functions gt page 151 See separate operating manual for instruc tions on how to use the telephone Tele Aid The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys tem may only be performed by com pleting the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding ac tivation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more Controls in detail Useful features The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e Automatic and manual emergency e Roadside Assistance e Information The Tele Aid syst
92. the audio system head unit Consult the separate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone for information on how to place a 911 emergency call on the mobile phone A The 911 emergency call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a crim inal offense Warning Controls in detail Audio system The following conditions must be met for a 911 emergency call e Telephone must be switched on e The corresponding mobile communica tions network must be available 1 Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and or telephone functions are active Check with your local service providers If you cannot make an emergency call you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself Controls in detail Audio system GSM network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation PIN appears in the audio display Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press OK soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked gt Press button to switch
93. the fastened seat belts The passenger air bag will only be de ployed if e the passenger seat is occupied e the indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 77 e the impact exceeds a preset deploy ment threshold Do not place objects heavier than 20 Ibs 9 kg on the passenger seat This could cause the front air bag or head thorax air bag on the passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Kneebags The driver side kneebag is located on the driver s side lower instrument panel The passenger side kneebag is located on the passenger side below the glove box They are designed to operate together with the air bags in certain frontal impacts exceed ing a preset threshold The kneebags oper ate best in conjunction with properly positioned and fastened seat belts Head thorax air bags 1 Head thorax air bag The head thorax air bags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front air bags The passenger side head thorax air bag will only deploy if the system senses that the passenger seat is occupied The head thorax air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the sys tem s deployment threshold Seat belts When the engine is started the seat belt telltale illuminates for a maximum of 6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to remind you and you
94. the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Display messages Run Flat Indicator inactive Tire pressure Check tires Check tires Then reactivate Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator unavailable Warning Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The Run Flat Indicator is malfunc gt tioning The pressure is too low in one or gt more tires There was a warning message about gt a loss in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator has not been reactivated yet The Run Flat Indicator has been gt switched off due to an error Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as required gt page 329 If necessary change the wheel gt page 408 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values gt page 304 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center N You may lose control of the vehicle Contin ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces sive heat build up and possibly a fire the ability
95. there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Control and operation of radio transmitter COMAND radio and telephone ZN Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND radio or tele phone if road traffic and weather condi tions permit Warning Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Operation Driving instructions Telephones and two way radios A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury Warning Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation in structions regarding use of an external antenna Op
96. this Operator s Manual 09 dil Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer reservoir is located on the passenger side of the engine com partment SLK 350 example 1 Washer fluid reservoir cap Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of approx 7 4 US qt 7 Operation Engine compartment During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container Warning A N Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Pull cap upward using latch until it opens Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or commercially available premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze de pending on ambient temperatures Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point Failure to do so could re sult in damage to the washer sys tem reservoir
97. this procedure for each tire Run Flat Indicator While the vehicle is being driven the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rota tional speed This allows the system to de tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re stricted manner or with a delay if e snow chains are mounted to the vehicle e winter road conditions prevail e you are driving on a loose surface e g sand or gravel e you are driving in a very sporty manner involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves Operation Tires and wheels Warning A N When the multifunction display shows the message Low pressure mode Check tires max Speed 50 mph one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle s tire information placard Driv ing on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the r
98. to telephone operation Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency If no SIM card is in the mobile phone NO SERVICE appears in the audio display In that case you only can make an emergency call on the mobile phone itself without the use of the head unit TDMA CDMA network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation CODE appears in the audio display Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press OK soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked p gt Press button to switch to telephone operation gt Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit gt Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection gt Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Controls in detail Audio system Controls in detail Power
99. to steer or brake the vehicle Practical hints What to do if Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Battery Alternator The battery is no longer charging gt Stop immediately and check the poly V belt Visit workshop Possible causes E Oken e Alternator malfunctioning gt Do not continue to drive Notify an au e Broken poly V belt thorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not forget that the brake system If it is in order requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capa bility Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stop ping distance is increased gt Drive immediately to the nearest autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Adjust driv ing to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Release You are driving with the parking gt Release parking brake gt page 52 parking brake brake set Canada only USA only Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluidin b Risk of accident Stop the vehicle and notify Visit workshop the reservoir an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the Canada only yee aiid OQ Brake wear The brake pads have reached their Have the brake pads replaced as soon as Visit workshop wear limit possible ng Alha Sennie If you
100. tone level accordingly Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting balance gt Press RJ button BALANCE appears in the display Returning sound functions to factory settings Adjusting treble gt Press button repeatedly until TREBLE appears in the display gt Press button to call up settings menu in the display P82 60 4451 31 P82 60 4453 31 P82 60 4452 31 gt Press or soft key to increase or Press lt lt lt or gt gt gt softkey decrease tone level accordingly gt Press RES soft key briefly the respec a on tive sound function is reset to its center The volume is distributed between the level left and right sides of the vehicle gt Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble ae tones to their center level 2 gt Press and hold RES soft key until RESET gt Press RES soft key briefly The radio switches back to the i appears in the display standard radio menu 8 seconds after The balance is reset to its center level the last soft key is pressed The sound settings for bass and treble are returned to their center level and the volume is set to a predefined level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 4 seconds after the last soft key is pressed The radio switches back to the standard ra
101. type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 336 Operation Tires and wheels Rim diameter The rim diameter gt page 334 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating gt page 334 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 Ibs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load gt page 340 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs Operation Tires and wheels For additional information on tire load Tire speed rating Warning rating see Load identification The tire speed ratin gt page 334 gt page 338 p g gt pag The tire load rating must always be at least nual Cate EARO VEA MAMUN HEEG half of the GAWR gt page 344 of your vehi Qe for the tire cle Otherwise tire failure may be the result Tire load rating gt page 334 and which may cause
102. while indicator lamp 2 remains on when e the temperature of the vehicle inte rior is above 86 F 30 C e the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95 F 35 C When these conditions do not apply anymore steering wheel heating con tinues Controls in detail Useful features Switching off gt Turn switch at tip of lever in direction of arrow 3 and release it The steering wheel heating is switched off Indicator lamp 2 goes out Indicator lamp flashes or switches off in case of e power surge or undervoltage e steering wheel heating malfunction The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find de The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles 1500 km you may tailed information on operating maintain during the break in period the more satis gradually increase vehicle and engine ing and caring for your vehicle fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum on H Additional instructions for SLK 55 AMG e During the first 1000 miles 1500 km do not exceed a speed of 85 mph 140 km h e Drive your v
103. windows Opening and closing the windows The windows are opened and closed eletri cally Switches for operating the driver and passenger door windows are located on the driver s door A switch for operating the passenger door window is located on the passenger door The door windows can also be operated using the retractable hardtop switch gt page 248 The rear side windows can only be operated using the retractable hardtop switch gt page 248 or the SmartKey gt page 249 1 Left window 2 Right window Warning A N When closing the windows make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was pressed past the resis tance point and released by pressing the re spective switch The door windows are equipped with the ex press close and automatic reversal func tion If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circum stance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing and holding the switch by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pushing and holding the retractable hardtop switch
104. 0 Cruise CONTIO ccsssecceeeesceees 260 LORAINE yrii e TEATE 265 ROOGTACK cacciadioseossesratenaennnowaans 265 Useful features cccssccccesssseeeeees 266 Storage compartments 266 Shelf behind roll bars 06 268 Cup holder cii e 268 ASN AV caras a 269 Cigarette lighter neseensseensseees 270 Power Outlet cccccsssscceeeseeees 271 Floormat driver s side only 271 Telephone oesesssesseesseesseesseeseesseess 272 TEISA aea a E 273 Garage door Opener nsessssessseees 281 Heated steering wheel SLK 280 SLK 350 Canada only 288 Operation c cece ceesccceeeeeeeeeeees 291 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 292 Driving INSTrUCTIONS ceecceeeeeeeees 293 Drive sensibly save fuel 293 Drinking and driving seeeeees 293 Pedals vatcupatcoragsosestectauebteanbeenarce 293 Power ASSISTANCE eeeccceeeeeee eens 293 LAK 2 e N contseranignnoeninee 294 Driving Of acssncinnsessriisesucssunsvnersevers 296 Parking sicscensine seratnonsnbeenanaaeiioevonndehes 296 MNCS EE EE AE 297 Hydroplaning cccccseseecceeseeeeees 297 Tire traction sssessseessssesssersseeee 298 Tire speed rating sssenseseesseee 298 Winter driving instructions 299 Standing Water cccceeccceseeeeees 300 Passenger compartment 301 Driving ADrOA ceeeccesseecceeeees 3
105. 00 387 0100 Controls in detail Useful features i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Useful features Canada only This device complies with RSS 2 10 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Heated steering wheel SLK 280 SLK 350 Canada only The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel The lever is on the lower left hand side of the steering wheel C Switching on 2 Indicator lamp 3 Switching off Switching on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Turn switch at tip of lever in direction of arrow 1 and release it The steering wheel is heated Indicator lamp 2 comes on The steering wheel heating is tempo rarily suspended
106. 01 Control and operation of radio transmitter eee ceeeseeceeeeeeeeees 301 Catalytic converter cs00sce0 302 EMISSION CONTIOl ccccceeeeeeeeee 302 Coolant temperature 06 303 At the gas Station ccceeeccceeeeeeeees 304 Refueling cccccccesssecceseeeeeeeeees 304 Check regularly and before alone Tl Oss canscensnseeahacatntneseatueatens 305 Engine compartment csseeceeeee 307 OO er E EET 307 Engine Oll cccesescceessceceeseeees 308 Transmission fluid level 313 Coolant level ccccseescceeeeeeeees 313 Be Baha acct ctrentecteeasncecenauncasieawest 314 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 315 Tires and Wheels ccccsescceeseeeeees 317 Important guidelines 066 317 Tire care and maintenance 318 Direction of rotation c 320 Loading the vehicle 668 320 Recommended tire inflation DIOSSULE cscccseccnsscesscesscesscees 327 Checking tire inflation pressure 329 MOExtended system 665 333 Tire labDeling cccssecccesseeceeeeees 334 Load identification ceeeeeee 338 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN E E T 339 Maximum tire load ccceeee 340 Maximum tire inflation pressure 341 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles 341 Tire ply material
107. 1 715847681 Order No 6515 3255 13 Part No 171 584 76 81 USA Edition A 2006 Operator s Manual SLK Class Operator s Manual SLK Class Mercedes Benz SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you e Please pay attention to the warnings on the purchase of your new and cautions contained in this manual Mercedes Benz They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your de We extend our best wishes for many miles sire to own an automobile that will be as of safe pleasurable driving easy as possible to operate and provide MercedesBenz USA LLC years of service A DaimlerChrysler Company cupants Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time e Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz INtrOGUCTION cccececcecescscescecees 9 Product information c ccceeeeceececees 9 Operators Manual csseeeeeeeeeees 10 Service and warranty
108. 118 Trunk lid emergency release 100 Trunk lid lock 395 Unlocking with SmartKey 96 Turn signals 55 401 Additional in mirrors 401 TWI see Treadwear indicators U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 346 Unlocking 34 Centrally from inside 102 In an emergency 280 With SmartKey 34 Upholstery Cleaning 360 Useful features Ashtray 269 Cigarette lighter 270 Cup holder 268 Floormat Driver s side only 271 Garage door opener 281 Heated steering wheel 288 Parcel net 267 Power outlet 271 Storage compartments interior 266 Tele Aid 273 Telephone 272 V Valve extractor Vehicle tool kit 388 Vehicle Battery 314 421 Bulbs 401 Fuses 430 Individual settings Control system 134 Jump starting 424 Lifting with jack 413 Locking 62 Proper use of 16 Towing 426 Unlocking locking in an emergency 394 Vehicle capacity weight 346 Vehicle care 353 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 389 Vehicle loading terminology 344 Vehicle status message memory menu Control system 132 Vehicle tool kit 388 Collapsible wheel chock 390 Vehicle washing see Vehicle care VIN 436 463 W Warning sounds Anti theft alarm system 87 Driver s seat belt 71 Exterior lighting 61 111 Maintenance service indicator 351 Panic alarm 80 Parking brake 53 363 Tow away alarm 88 Warranty coverage 435 Washing the vehicle see Vehicle care Wear pattern Tires 347 Weights 448 Wheel bolts 392 Wheel chock Vehicle tool kit 388
109. 2805 31 Press button or E to select the desired setting The selected display is then shown continuously in the lower display The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display e Digital speedometer or e Outside temperature Time Date submenu Access the Time Date submenu via the Settings menu Use the Time Date submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings The following functions are available Function Page Time synchronization with head 139 unit Setting the time hours 139 Setting the time minutes 140 Setting the date month 141 Setting the date day 141 Setting the date year 142 Time and date synchronization with head unit This function can only be seen on vehicles with COMAND and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or MESH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button aM or Keg repeatedly until you see Synchronization with head unit in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting D Synchronization with head unit im o off e P54 32 3345 31 gt Press button or E to select the desired setting Controls in detail Control system Setting the time hours This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND and navigation module if the time and date synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off gt page 139 Vehicles wit
110. 29 INAV IMGMIU ccssachsuntieercevsdteanantondas 132 Vehicle status message memory MENU ccccceeeeceeeeeeneees 132 Settings MENU cccccseseecceeeees 134 Trip computer Menu 6 088 149 TEL menu scssasasvsorsesreccnensesesavenenes 151 Manual transmission ccceeeeeee 159 Shifting into reverse 156 Automatic transmission 006 157 Gear selector lever position 159 Gear ranges essssenssseresseesssersse 160 Driving TID Si cccotaasehebcssteseoateacsseretan Automatic shift program Gear selector lever one touch SEArSNIMiINS areen er Aa Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting Manual shift program SLK SS AMG imocssshectaleesaveieeees Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 00066 Good visibility eeeeeeeeeeee eee ees Headlamp cleaning system Rear VIEW MILTOMS ccsseeceeeeeees SUNNI SOLS AT a Sects Rear window defroster 6 Climate controlorii Switching climate control system on off asacrespentuvevecremberseiens Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume 0008 Basic S ttiNngS ccccccseeeceneeees Defrosting windshield 6 Air recirculation mode 06 Air CONCITIONING 0ecceeeeeeceeeee Residual engine heat utilization 162 163 Automatic climate control
111. 38 or outside temperature for status indicator Selecting digital speedometer display mode gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu gt Press button FA or Re repeatedly until you see Display unit Digital Speedometer in the multifunction dis play The selection marker is on the current setting Pi Display unit Digital speedometer miles P54 32 3344 31 gt Press button or E to set the speedometer unit to km or miles gt Controls in detail Control system Selecting language Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu Press button J or Ref repeatedly until you see Language in the multifunc tion display The selection marker is on the current setting fat Language English z P54 32 3237 31 Press button or E to select the desired language to be used for the multifunction display messages gt gt b gt Controls in detail Control system Available languages German English Italian French Spanish Selecting display speed display or out side temperature for status indicator gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until you see Select display in the multifunction display gt The selection marker is on the current setting fei Select display Se Outs temp amp P54 32
112. 436 Layout of poly V belt drive 437 SLK 280 SLK 350 uu eee 437 SLK SIAMO srusen 437 ENGINE seieren 438 Rims and tires ccccceeeccesseceeceeenes 439 Same SIZE tires eee eeecceesceeeeeeeees 441 Mixed size tiP S ccceeccceeeeceeeeees 443 Spare wheel with collapsible tire 445 Electrical system ccssssccseseceeees 446 Main DIMENSIONS cccceecceeeceneees 447 WEEN Sis aaictad secatiesea cor npea eanan 448 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 449 Es Capacities norii aED 449 Technical terms cccccccccee 457 Engine ONS 0 asceassiewnestsnaeseanenvecedes 451 Engine oil additives 00 cee 451 ee Air conditioning refrigerant ant ht AG MAE scc6corianseanegorearsaatitve slenaaincttend 465 Brake fluid naenin 451 Premium unleaded gasoline 452 Fuel requirements 0cccceees 452 Gasoline additives cecccceee 453 SOOlAMUS haer eens 453 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 456 Y Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitabili ty for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefor
113. 5 F 15 C Otherwise the roof and other parts of the vehicle could be damaged Cargo compartment cover The cargo compartment cover is located in the trunk P77 00 2181 31 Cargo compartment cover Closing gt Pull the cargo compartment cover at the handle in direction of the arrow un til it engages on both sides at the trunk sill Opening gt Press the release handle on the cargo compartment cover gt Guide the cargo compartment cover forward to its end stop To prevent damage to the retractable hardtop or luggage cargo when lower ing the roof e Load trunk only to the height of the cargo compartment cover e Do not permit luggage cargo to push up the closed cargo compart ment cover e Do not place anything on top or in front of the cargo compartment cover e Do not place anything on the shelf behind the roll bar Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Retractable hardtop AN To prevent possible accidents drive the ve hicle only with the retractable hardtop either completely closed and locked or fully low ered into its storage compartment Warning For safety reasons the retractable hardtop cannot be opened or closed while driving Make sure the retractable hardtop and the rear window are dry before you open it Otherwise water may enter the interior and or trunk Controls in detail Retractable hardtop i The switch for opening closing the retr
114. 7 mm 3 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center SLK 55 AMG SLK 55 AMG Performance Package 225 40 R18 92H XL Extra Load M S 7 5 Jx 18 H2 1 46 in 37 mm Mixed size tires SLK 280 Front axle Rims light alloy 7 x 16 H2 Wheel offset 1 34 in 34 mm Summer tires 205 55 R16 91W Rear axle Rims light alloy 8 J x16 H2 Wheel offset 1 18 in 30 mm 3 Summer tires 225 50 R16 92W l Radial ply tires 2 Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator only 3 Must not be used with snow chains Technical data Rims and tires SLK 280 SLK 350 Teo NX 7 H2 1 42 in 36 mm 225 45 R17 91W or 225 45 R17 91W MOExtended 8 5 J x17 H2 1 18 in 30 mm 245 40 R17 91W or 245 40 R17 91W MOExtended 2 Technical data Rims and tires SLK 280 Sport Package SLK 55 AMG SLK 350 Sport Package SLK 55 AMG Performance Package Front axle Rims light alloy eal Z 7 5 x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1 46 in 37 mm 1 46 in 37 mm Summer tires 225 45 R17 91W 225 40 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load r Yay R17 91W MOExtended 7 Rear axle Rims light alloy 8 5 J x17 H2 8 5 J x18 H2 Wheel offset 1 18 in 30 mm 1 18 in 30 mm Summer tires 245 40 R17 91W 245 35 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load or 245 40 R17 91W MOExtended 2 Radial ply tires Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator only 3 Must not be used with snow chains Spare wheel with collapsible tire Rim l
115. D2S 35W lamp Do not replace the Bi Xenon bulbs yourself See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Replacing bulbs Notes on bulb replacement Warning A N Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type yu j y yP Mercedes Benz Center Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Al low the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb Keep bulbs out of reach of children Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a Clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors e Bi Xenon lamps e Front fog lamps e High mounted brake lamp e Brake lamps e Front and rear side marker lamps e Parking standing lamps in the tail lamp assemblies Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly Replacing bulbs for f
116. K 350 171 456 272 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 6 3 66 in 92 90 mm 3 39 in 86 00 mm 213 5 cu in 3498 cm 10 7 1 268 hp 6000 rpm 200 kW 6000 rpm 258 b ft 2400 5000 rpm 350 Nm 2400 5000 rpm 6500 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 2404 mm SLK 55 AMG 171 473 113 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 8 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 60 in 92 00 mm 331 8 cu in 5439 cm 11 1 355 hp 5750 rpm 265 kW 5750 rpm 376 Ib ft 4000 rpm 510 Nm 4000 rpm 6700 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2380 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Vv Rims and tires Only use tires which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes Benz Tires approved by Mercedes Benz are developed to pro vide best possible performance in con junction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire s side wall e MO Mercedes Benz Original equipment tires e MOE Mercedes Benz Original Extended tires with limited run flat characteristics original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz may result in dam age that is not covered by
117. Key do the following gt gt Close the passenger door and the trunk lid Press the central locking switch in the upper part of the center console gt page 102 Check to see whether the locking knob on the passenger door has moved down If necessary push it down manually The passenger door is locked Exit the vehicle and close the driver s door gt D gt D Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency 1 Locking gt Insert the mechanical key into the driver s door lock until it stops gt Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1 The driver s door is locked Manually unlocking the gear selector lever automatic transmission In case of power failure the gear selector lever can be manually unlocked e g to tow the vehicle 1 Gear selector lever cover 2 Release Insert flat blunt object e g screwdriv er into the left edge of cover Q at the position indicated by the arrows Loosen cover Q using this object Using your hands pull cover Q out and remove Push down and hold release 2 in di rection of arrow Simultaneously move gear selector le ver out of position P The gear selector lever is unlocked now The gear selector lever is locked again as soon as you place it in position P again Y Opening closing in an emergency Raising retractable hardtop manually Warning A N If the retractable hardtop doe
118. Locking unlocking from inside 102 Certification label 436 CHECK ENGINE indicator lamp 364 Child safety Air bags 66 Children in the vehicle 75 Cigarette lighter 270 Cleaning tires 319 Climate control 178 Air conditioning 187 Air recirculation mode 185 Control panel overview 179 Switching on off 181 Clock 122 Cockpit 458 Overview 22 Cold tire inflation pressure 344 Collapsible tire 458 Collapsible wheel chock 390 COMAND 122 458 Navigation 132 Radio transmitter 301 Combination switch 114 High beam flasher 114 High beam headlamps 55 114 Low beam headlamps 55 Turn signals 55 Windshield wipers 56 Comfort driving Transmission program mode 163 Compatible child seat see BabySmart Control system 123 458 AUDIO menu 129 Convenience submenu 147 Coolant temperature 128 Instrument cluster submenu 137 Lighting submenu 143 Maintenance service indicator 350 Menus 124 Messages in display 368 Multifunction display 123 Multifunction steering wheel 124 NAV menu 132 Overview Menus 126 Overview Settings submenus 136 Resetting 134 Settings menu 134 Standard display 128 TEL menu 151 Time date submenu 139 Trip computer menu 149 Vehicle status message memory menu 132 Vehicle submenu 147 Controller Area Network see CAN system Convenience closing Power windows 249 Retractable hardtop 257 Coolant 313 Adding water 306 Anticorrosion antifreeze 454 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 453 Technical data 449 Temperature 303
119. Magazine slot is in use red LED flashes CD is being ejected Controls in detail Audio system Loading the CD magazine If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read WRONG CDO will appear in the display Loading one or more CDs interrupts the CD playback Loading single CDs gt Open the glove box Pa 60 4345 31 1 CD loading slot 2 Magazine slot button gt gt Controls in detail Audio system gt gt Briefly press button 2 for the empty magazine slot that you would like to use The light emitting diode in the maga zine slot button flashes in green INSERT CD appears in the display along with the slot number The flashing light indicates that the CD changer is ready to receive a CD gt Insert an audio CD into CD loading slot Q within 5 seconds label side up The CD is pulled in and played gt Close the glove box Loading several CDs gt Open the glove box gt Press button 2 of an empty magazine slot for more than 2 seconds The light emitting diodes in all the mag azine slot buttons light up several times in green and ALL LOAD appears in the display gt Wait until the light emitting diode for the first magazine slot flashes in green The flashing light indicates that the CD changer is ready to receive a CD Insert an audio CD into CD loading slot Q within 5 seconds label side up The CD is pulled in and the light emit ting d
120. PRESSURE Placard Example B 1 Seating capacity Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Example A gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Example B gt Locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on your vehicle s placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo grams or XXX Ibs Step 4 gt The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x150 650 Ibs Step 5 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 gt D Operation Tires and w
121. Release handle 3 when the desired backrest tilt is reached When you hear an audible click the backrest is again fixed into place For more information see Seats gt page 104 Power seat adjustment The memory function gt page 107 lets you store the settings for power seats steering wheel adjustment electrical and exterior rear view mirrors The seat adjustment switches are located on the outer side of each seat Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Press the horizontal switch forward or backward in direction of arrow Q Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach Q Seat fore and aft adjustment the accelerator brake pedal safely 2 Seat height The position should be as far rearward 3 Backrest tilt as possible consistent with ability to 4 Seat cushion tilt properly operate controls gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Seat height a gt Press the horizontal switch up or down gt Open the respective door in direction of arrow 2 and adjust the seat height until your legs are slightly supported Backrest tilt gt Press the vertical switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 8 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Seat cushion tilt gt Press the horizontal switch up or down in direction of arrow until your up per legs are lightly supported Head restraint height Warning A N
122. S vehicles Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accord ingly Maximum loaded vehicle weight gt page 345 Maximum load rating gt page 345 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 345 Memory function Used to store three individual seat steering wheel and mirror positions MON Motor Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and gt RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Multifunction display Two display fields in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operat ing the control system Normal occupant weight gt page 345 Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial Avoid this engine speed range as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Poly V belt drive Drives engine components alternator AC compressor etc
123. TING CAPACITY 1 Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue if applicable should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 321 Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illus trations below Refer to placard on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle 3 se TIRE AND LOAQING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 Mai The combined weigh of occupants and cargo should never exceed KEX kg or XXX lbs ree se footers sones MANUAL FOR REAR P195 70RI4 200KPA 29PS ADDITIONAL sere resyro0is szoneacorst eal P40 00 2063 31 s SG7DAGTE4S15503 Placard Example A 1 Seating capacity VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION LE CAPACITY WEIGHT KG ILBS E il il COLD TIRE
124. Temperature checking Control system 128 Corner illuminating front fog lamps Lighting 115 Cruise control 260 458 Display message 370 Cup holder 268 Curb weight 344 Customer Assistance Center see CAC D Date Control system 141 142 Daytime running lamp mode 112 Control system 143 Deep water see Standing water Defrosting Rear window 177 Windshield Automatic climate control 197 Windshield Climate control 184 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties with starting 52 Direction of rotation Tires 320 Display text see Messages in display Doors Control panel overview 31 Entry lamps 119 Locking unlocking from outside 95 Opening from inside 97 Unlocking with Tele Aid 280 DOT 344 Drink holder see Cup holder Drinking and driving 293 Driver s air bag see Air bags Driver s door Locking in an emergency 395 Unlocking inanemergency 394 Driving 53 Automatic transmission 53 Driving off 296 Fuel saving 293 Hydroplaning 297 In winter 299 Instructions 47 293 Manual transmission 53 Standing water 300 Tires 297 Traveling abroad 301 Driving safety systems 82 ABS 82 BAS 83 ESP 84 E Easy entry exit feature Electric airpump 391 Electric air pump Vehicle tool kit 388 Electrical system Technical data 446 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Emergency call 911 243 Emergency callsystem 273 Tele Aid 275 Emergency operations Automatic transmission 172 Releasing trunk lid from inside 100 Remote
125. Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk lid emergency release j l Warning A The emergency release button unlocks Only drive with the trunk lid closed as on the inside of the trunk lid i i amp T l still or in motion among other dangers such as blocked visi With the emergency release button the bility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle trunk can be opened from inside the trunk a e or Illumination of the emergency release but ton e The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk o Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out e The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk i If the vehicle was previously centrally E The emergency release button does locked the trunk lid will lock automati not Uunlocicthe Eeunic ic the vehicle bat cally when closed The turn signal _ Emergency release button tery is discharged or disconnected lamps will flash three times to confirm gt Briefly press emergency release locking button Q The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly gt Push up the tru
126. act Opening able hardtop is on the lower part of the center console Before operating the retractable hard top via the retractable hardtop switch do the following first gt Push and hold the retractable hardtop switch in direction of arrow Q until the retractable hardtop is completely low e Engage the parking brake ered into the trunk gt page 59 Closing e Close the cargo compartment cover gt Push and hold the retractable hardtop switch in direction of arrow 2 until the retractable hardtop is completely closed and locked e Close the trunk lid e Switch on ignition gt page 36 Retractable hardtop switch 1 Opening 2 Closing For operating the power windows with the retractable hardtop switch gt page 248 Locking the retractable hardtop after raising lowering Warning A N Be sure to keep the hardtop switch pushed until the hardtop is fully opened or closed The hydraulic pump will then shut off To prevent possible accidents drive the ve hicle only with the hardtop either completely closed and locked or fully lowered into its storage compartment Warning A N If the retractable hardtop does not com pletely open or close the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered e after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on e after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the hardtop
127. afe place tem senses the passenger seat as being occupied There is a malfunction in the re gt Drive with added caution to the nearest au straint systems The air bags or thorized Mercedes Benz Center emergency tensioning devices ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an accident strongly recommend that you visit an or fatal injury or it might deploy authorized Mercedes Benz Center immedi unexpectedly and unnecessarily which ately to have the system checked otherwise could also result in an accident and or the SRS may not be activated when needed injury to you or to others in an accident which could result in serious Practical hints What to do if Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution X The passenger front air A BabySmart child seat is installed on bag off indicator lamp the passenger seat Therefore the passen comes on and remains ger front air bag is switched off illuminated The system is malfunctioning when there gt Have the system checked at an autho gt page 77 is no BabySmart child seat installed on rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as the passenger seat possible The passenger front air The system is malfunctioning gt Make sure there is nothing between bag off indicator lamp seat cushion and child seat does not come on or K gt Check installation of the child seat does not remain illumi gt page 75 nated wi
128. ag gt page 68 1 Loop for seat belt guidance 2 Latch plate 3 Release button 4 Buckle Getting started Driving Proper use of seat belts Do not twist the seat belt when fasten ing Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen Place the seat backrest in a nearly up right position Getting started Driving e Never use a Seat belt for more than one Starting the engine person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a per son and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Warning A N Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may seve
129. akes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing braking distance Apply con tinuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated A If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning normally but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen cy braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning A N The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the us er s safety or the safety of others ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine Is run ning and monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction betw
130. al will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent To help prevent brake disc corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only sub jected to moderate loads you should occa sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 83 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument clus ter stays on the brake fluid level in the res ervoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the res ervolr Have the brake system inspected immedi ately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes Benz A If other than
131. amp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 112 ap If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is reg istered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center sues Parking lamps also tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combi nation switch is pushed forward and parking lamps Exterior lamp switch lt a Standing lamps right turn left one stop mud Standing lamps left turn left two stops suis Indicator lamp for parking lamps Wm Indicator lamp for front fog lamps a Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on The message Turn off lights appears in the multifunction display Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off au tomatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light Low beam headlamps Tail and parking lamps License plate lamps Side marker lamps A If the exterior lamp switch is set to By Warning e the headlamps
132. ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance A The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Warning Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repr
133. an seated in the jack take up bracket Always in front of the rear wheel housings incline lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the Warning A N vehicle Position the jack only on the jack take up brackets designed for this purpose If the jack is not properly positioned the ve hicle may fall off of the jack gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a P40 00 2040 31 maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Never start engine while vehicle is raised Warning A N The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised Never lie down under the raised vehicle Practical hints Flat tire Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel P40 10 3492 31 P40 10 3165 31 4 Alignment bolt 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with collapsible tire located under plastic cover on the outside of spare wheel gt Replace this wheel bolt with alignment rim bolt supplied in the vehicle tool kit gt Unscrew the upper most wheel bolt and remove Remove the remaining bolts Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads gt Remove the wheel Practical hints Flat tire Ei Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the
134. an accident and or seri Tire speed rating gt page 334 are Warning uN ous personal injury to you or others also referred to as service descrip Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Always replace rims and tires with the same tion designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire Warning A N failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or Do not overload the tires by exceeding the personal injury and possible death for you specified load limit or vehicle capacity and for others weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Tire load rating G gt page 334 and Tire speed rating gt page 334 are also referred to as service descrip tion Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph 160 km h R up to 106 mph 170 km h S up to 112 mph 180 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 130 mph 210 km h V up to 149 mph 240 km h W up to 168 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Y above 186 mph 300 km h ZR above 149 mph 240 km h At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed c
135. ance gt Push the gearshift lever past this resis tance gt Then move the gearshift lever forward into position R Y Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an automatic transmission see Automatic transmission gt page 51 Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program During the brief warm up transmission upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission Controls in detail Automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on e the gear selector lever position D gt page 159 with gear ranges gt page 160 e the selected program mode C S gt page 163 or M C S SLK 55 AMG only gt page 169 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 162 e the vehicle speed Controls in detail Automatic transmission oe PRHEWS 72 F P54 32 3113 31 1 Current gear range gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range gear selector lever
136. ance service indicator following a completed maintenance service Operation Maintenance Calling up the maintenance service indicator gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 The standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 128 gt Press button JM or Red repeatedly on the multifunction steering wheel un til the maintenance service indicator appears in the multi function display gt page 124 bb Operation Maintenance If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator Do not confuse the maintenance ser vice indicator with the engine oil level indicator i Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center you can have the maintenance service indicator re set The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the main tenance service indicator in the mainte nance relevant information for your vehicle Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or directly from Mercedes Benz If the maintenance service in
137. and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected any modification made may produce an undesired effect on other sys tems Warning See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving Warning A N Heavy blows against the vehicle undercar riage or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and im pair the operating safety or your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that dam age to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers care fully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle undercarriage or tires wheels for possible damage If the ve hicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair fa cility for further inspection or repairs Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you a a re familiar with the following information nd rules the
138. ange Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special re ceivers GVW Gross Vehicle Weight gt page 344 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gt page 345 Head thorax air bag Installed in the doors these air bags protect occupants during side impact collisions exceeding a preset thresh old Unlike normal side air bags head thorax air bags are also designed to provide protection for the head area Instrument cluster The displays and indicator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision in cluding the tachometer speedometer coolant temperature and fuel gauge Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the automatic transmission down to the lowest possi ble gear This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Kilopascal kPa gt page 345 Line of fall The direct line an object moves down hill when influenced by the force of gravity alone Locking knob Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or un locked Pushing the locking knob down on an individual door from inside locks that door Maintenance System U
139. anger may be restricted in its ability to play MP3 data carriers it may play them with reduced sound quality or it may not be able to play them at all Problems may be encountered during playback of user written CDs with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB These CDs do not meet valid standards as of this printing Compatible MP3 data carriers The CD changer can read the following data carriers in MP3 mode e CD DA e CD R e CD RW Compatible file systems and compres sion methods Use Romeo or Joliet Depending on file for mat used up to 128 characters are possi ble The following compression methods are compatible e MP3 e WMA e WAV Compatible bit and sampling rates Fixed and variable bit rates of up to 320 kBit s are possible The following table lists possible sampling rates MPEG1 44 1 KHz 48 KHz Audio Layer3 32 KHZ MPEG2 22 5 KHz 24 KHz Audio Layer3 16 KHz MPEG2 5 11 025 KHz Audio Layer3 12 KHz 8 KHz WMA 32 KHz 44 1 KHz 48 KHz Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of 128 kBit s or higher and with the spec ified sampling rates The use of rates other than those spec ified may lead to noticeably inferior sound quality Controls in detail Audio system Information on copyright The music tracks that you create for use in MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode are subject to copyright laws under appli cable international and national regula tions In many coun
140. anticovestesteosseseceensenaccacteaseas 45 DEVINE onra na 47 Fastening the seat belts 47 Starting the engine ccceccee ees 50 Parking Drake ccecccceseseeeeeeeeees 92 DEA earn E 53 Switching on headlamps 55 Tum SIETIGIS sienn 55 Windshield WIPEPS 0ccccseeeeeees 56 Problems while driving 0000000 58 Parking and lOCKING cccccseeecceeeeees 59 Parking Drake ccccsseseseeessseees 59 Switching off headlamps 60 Turning Off Engine ceeccccssseeeees 61 SOCK INS setesi eenean 62 Safety and Security 00 63 Occupant Safety cceecccccssseeeeeseeees 64 Ait DISS seersant 65 Seat belts nnnsesnenessesensssseeesssssee 71 Children in the vehicle 00 75 Panic alarm Vossentwadaieaventtahecbiohacstenaseeniarns 80 ACGUVAUN E sissies snnsnewnengniceanvasunaneusansene 81 Deactivating sssenssseessseeesseessseeo 81 Driving safety SySteEMS ccccceeeeeeees 82 PDS E A E TETT 82 eE S E EE E 83 ESP E E 84 Anti theft SySteMs cssscccessseeeeees 87 IMMODIIZEL eesecceeessecceeeecceeeees 87 Anti theft alarm system 00 87 Tow away alarm cccseescceeeeceneeees 88 Controls in detail cccceeeeeees 91 Locking and unlocking 92 SMAK CY eienenn E 92 Opening the doors from the inside 97 Opening the trunk s sssssssseenssses
141. anual transmission Gearshift lever Retractable hardtop opening closing switch Tow away alarm deactivation switch Parking brake lever Storage compartment Telephone compartment Page 157 Ss 252 89 52 266 Oo At a glance Center console Item Passenger side exterior rear view mirror switch Driver s side exterior rear view mirror switch Exterior rear view mirrors adjustment switch Automatic transmission Program mode selector switch Page 45 173 45 173 45 173 163 169 At a glance Overhead control panel S 8 OC P82 00 2350 31 Item Interior lighting on off Interior lighting automatic control switch Right reading lamp on off Tele Aid emergency call system button Garage door opener Sensor for auto dimming mirrors Interior rear view mirror Left reading lamp on off Page 117 119 117 273 281 174 45 173 119 Y Door control panel Item Door handle Power window switch for opening closing passenger side window Power window switch for opening closing driver s side window Page 97 246 246 At a glance Door control panel a ss LL Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking Getting started Unlocking The Getting started section provides an overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Me
142. apability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description is comprised of the tire load rating G gt page 334 and the tire speed rating gt page 334 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description G and 6 gt page 334 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed ca pability If a service description and gt page 334 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h Operation Tires and wheels Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire Operation Tires and wheels All season and winter tires Load identification In addition to tire loa
143. apply brakes cautiously in the rain Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires gt page 348 with a minimum tread depth of approximately in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with sum mer tires Stopping distance however is still consid erably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appro priate caution Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use pru dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail ing conditions A Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fai
144. approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anti corrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temper ature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution There fore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB Anticorrosion Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leak age Please make sure the mixture Is in accordance with label instructions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of alumi num parts The use of aluminum compo nents in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifical ly formulated to protect the aluminum parts Failure to use such anticorro sion antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes Benz 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze agent Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is al
145. apter Attempting to play CDs with an 8 cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Should excessively high or low tempera tures occur while in CD changer mode CD TEMP will appear in the display and the CD will be muted until the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation The single CD player and the CD changer play audio CDs Tips on handling CDs Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback Avoid scratches fingerprints and dust on the CDs Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth Never wipe the CD in a circular motion instead wipe it in a straight line start ing in the center and moving outward Do not use solvents anti static sprays etc for cleaning Replace the CD in its case after use Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight MP3 The CD changer can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files Information on MP3 data carriers CD media CD burning software and CD writers are available in great vari ety Due to this variety it cannot be guaranteed that the CD changer will be able to play every user written CD The burning process can lead to data errors and aging of the medium may re sult in data loss Therefore the CD ch
146. ar selector lever to position N or declutch in case of manual transmission Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action o For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 349 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of control loss Warning Operation Driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficien cy should be tested as soon as possible af ter driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking ma neuvers Warning AN If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monox ide CO gases may enter the vehicle interi or resulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the ve hicl
147. ar view mirrors 174 Automatic climate control Air conditioning 200 Automatic mode basic setting 194 Control panel 192 Deactivating 194 Overview 190 Automatic locking Control system 147 When driving 101 Automatic shift program 163 Automatic transmission 157 Automatic transmission fluid ATF 313 Driving 53 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 172 Fluid level 313 Gear ranges 160 Gear selector lever 157 Gear selector lever Unlocking manually 396 Gear shifting malfunctions 172 Gearshift pattern 51 Kickdown 162 Manual shifting 164 One touch gearshifting 164 Program mode selector switch 163 B BabySmart Air bag deactivation system 457 Compatible child seats 76 457 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 77 Back up lamp 401 Bar 344 BAS 83 457 Battery SmartKey Replacing 398 Battery Vehicle 314 421 Jump starting 424 Bead 344 Bi Xenon 457 Headlamps 401 Brake Assist System see BAS Brakes 294 Brake fluid 306 451 Display message 375 SLK 55 AMG 295 Warning lamp 363 Break in period 292 Bulbs Front rear lamps 401 Replacing 400 401 C CAC 457 California important notice 11 CAN system 458 Capacities Fuels coolants lubricants etc 449 Cargo compartment cover 253 Carpets cleaning 359 Catalytic converter 302 CD Changer 219 266 Player Changer operation 131 219 CD changer Audio system 223 Center console 28 Lamp 367 Central locking Automatic 101 147 From outside SmartKey 62
148. are shown in the multi function display 1 cD4 TEs 5 2 P 4 39 2798 31 C Current CD CDO for single CD drive in head unit CD1 through CD6 for CD in CD changer 2 Current track Controls in detail Control system gt Press button JM or Red repeatedly until the desired track is selected To select a CD from the magazine press a number on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard Controls in detail Control system NAV menu The NAV menu contains the functions need ed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the message NAV in the multifunction display e Ifthe COMAND system is switched off the message NAV off is shown in the multifunction display e With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated the direction of travel and if available the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunc tion display e With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated the direc tion of travel and maneuver instruc tions appear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the sys tem Such messages appear in the multi function display a
149. arge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger gt Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer Reinstall the charged battery Follow the previously described steps in re verse order The battery its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation Reconnecting the battery gt gt Turn off all electrical consumers Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover Connect the negative lead Never invert the terminal connections Reinstall the water tray Practical hints Battery The following procedures must be car ried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnec tion e Set the clock gt page 139 e Synchronize the power windows gt page 251 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Practical hints Jump starting Warning A N Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting as you could otherwise be injured Battery
150. arranty Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Observe the coolant temperature display gt page 128 i Doing so may cause serious engine The engine should not be operated with damage which is not covered by the the coolant temperature above 248 F Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 120 C Display symbol Display message Coolant stop engine off Coolant Check level Warning A N Driving when your engine is badly overheat ed can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Possible cause consequence The coolant is too hot gt gt The coolant level is too low The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A N Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine Onl
151. as possible In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Warning A N Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Keep away from open flame or heat source Practical hints Flat tire If sealant has leaked out let it dry You can then peel it off lt _ P40 10 3308 31 1 TIREFIT container 2 Flap 3 Notch 4 Electrical plug Air hose 6 Flange gt Open flap on the electric air pump gt Pull plug and air hose out of the pump housing gt D Practical hints Flat tire gt gt gt Screw the air pump s air hose onto flange 6 of the TIREFIT container gt Stick TIREFIT container Q upside down into notch 3 of the electric air pump P40 10 4103 31 7 Tire valve Electric air pump switch 9 Pressure gauge and vent screw Filler hose A Observe safety instructions on air pump la bel Warning vy Unscrew the valve cap from tire valve Q Screw filler hose 0 onto tire valve 7 Close vent screw 9 on air hose 4 Insert electrical plug into the power outlet in the passenger footwell gt page 271 The cigarette lighter gt page 270 is not designed for use with the electric air pump Use the power outlet in the passenger footwell gt page
152. asons have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel Warning A N In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should insert CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by road weather and traffic conditions Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car covers a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second General notes The system may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection Playing copied CDs may cause malfunctions during playback o The audio system plays both CD Rs and CD RWs with audio data Controls in detail Audio system If you affix stickers to the CDs they can become warped due to the heat that develops in the CD drive or CD changer In certain situations the CDs can then no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drive Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your CD drive or CD changer has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard You can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1 3 mm If you insert thicker data carriers e g ones that have data on both sides one side with DVD data the other side with audio data they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive Controls in detail Audio system Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter not even with a CD ad
153. ata shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and tires gt page 439 Tire size designation load and speed rating C Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width G gt page 334 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 gt page 334 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The tire code gt page 334 indicates the tire construction
154. ause consequence The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark The fuel cap may not be closed properly You are driving with the retractable hardtop not properly locked The retractable hardtop is malfunctioning You are driving with the hood open The SmartKey is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt Refuel at the next gas station gt page 304 Check the fuel cap gt page 304 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt gt Have the fuel system checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Stop the vehicle in a safe location Observe the traffic situation around you Push the retractable hardtop switch forward or rearward until the retractable hardtop is completely closed or open gt page 252 Have the retractable hardtop checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Close the hood gt page 307 Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Display symbol O ows 1 Display message 3rd brake light Tail lamp brake lamp left Back up lamp on Tail lamp brake lamp Plea Back up lamp on Brake lamp Visit workshop Front wer leila i Front foglamp R Possible cause consequence The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working The le
155. ay When you insert your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone into the telephone cradle you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 237 This display disappears when you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must now enter the code P82 60 4469 31 gt Enter code using buttons EE to a gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number Controls in detail Audio system gt Press OK soft key after entering correct code The telephone is unlocked If you have entered an incorrect code you must enter the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press button for approx 3 seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the display Adjusting the volume button gt Turn rotary control of during a telephone call The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned a The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode Controls in detail Audio system Adjust
156. ayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature displays caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driv ing Controls in detail Instrument cluster Trip odometer gt Make sure you are viewing the stan dard display menu gt page 128 Press and hold reset button until the trip odometer is reset Clock Vehicles with COMAND The clock in the instrument cluster can be synchronized with the time set in COMAND using the time synchronization with head unit feature gt page 139 or set independently from COMAND using the control system gt page 139 with the time synchronization with head unit feature set to Off For setting the time in COMAND see sep arate COMAND operating instructions For setting the time with audio system gt page 139 Y Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch Is turned to position 1 The control system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control sys tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster dis play and much more a The displays for the audio systems radio CD player will appear in English regardless of the language selected A A driver s attention to the road and traffi
157. bed in the Safety and Security section gt page 82 Cruise control The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 22 Warning A N The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation Only use the cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger Ous On winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate the cruise control when driv ing in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed 1 Set current or higher speed 2 Set current or lower speed
158. bly starting at 72 F 22 C The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Controls in detail Automatic climate control Increasing gt Press temperature button s 4 and or gt page 192 until the desired temperature appears in the control panel display 4 gt page 192 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing gt Press temperature button s 1 and or 2 gt page 192 until the desired temperature appears in the control panel display 4 gt page 192 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution control page 192 to adjust the air distribution The following symbols are found on the control Symbol Function Directs air through the center side and cockpit air vents Directs air to the windows and side air vents Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells and side air vents Turn air distribution control gt page 192 to the desired position The indicator lamp on the button Mg gt page 192 goes out The automatic air distribution is switched off The air distribution is controlled according to the selected control setting You can also turn the control to a position between
159. bo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons Jj to QM on the radio head unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE until the call is made Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function If you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial fe TERLE PES CLER MUM RCU P82 60 4621 31 Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button WW or BA The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the callers telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the phone book appears in the display If the caller s number i
160. c conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving Warning For your safety and the safety of others se lecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions per mit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display 26753 Q miles 143 53 PRNEISI 72 F P54 32 3114 31 1 Main odometer 2 Trip odometer 3 Current program mode automatic transmission only 4 Status indicator outside tempera ture digital soeedometer Current gear selector lever posi tion gear range automatic transmission only Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc tion steering wheel Multifunction display Operating the control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease 3 Telephone Press button to take a call or to dial a call to end a call or to reject an incoming call Moving within a menu Press button
161. calls can be terminated us ing the button on the multifunc tion steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND head unit If the indicator lamps do not start flash ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not cur rently active and may not initiate a call Visit your Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are ac tive an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take pri ority and override all other active calls The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is conclud ed Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls which can also be terminated by pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND head unit Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada
162. ce jobs must be carried out regularly accord ing to Mercedes Benz servicing require ments For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions e g stop and go city traffic the coolant temperature may rise to approx 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display gt page 376 Operation Driving instructions Warning A N e Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine
163. cess pres Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine coolant is a mixture of water aes pr as l sure If opened immediately scalding The transmission fluid level does not need and anticorrosion antifreeze To check E a man il netb loaner to be checked If you notice transmission the coolant level the vehicle must be der pressure fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions parked on level ground and the engine e Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into Warning A N contact with hot engine parts have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center must be cool check the transmission In order to avoid any possibly serious burns e Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated e Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Operation Engine compartment The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment we SLK 350 example 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap 3 Marking bar in the expansion tank gt Using a rag turn cap 2 slowly approx imately one half turn counterclockwise to releas
164. ching between calls gt Press and buttons This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold The connection to both callers is terminated Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated You are again connected with the caller previously placed on hold TDMA or CDMA network phones Warning A N A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the tele phone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic con ditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Using your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the mobile telephone If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the displ
165. ciousness and possible death Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Step 2 gt If you have previously programmed an signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and and release them only when the indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and be gin directly with step 3 Step 3 gt Hold the end of the hand held remote control of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the signal trans mitter button or to be pro grammed while keeping the indicator lamp in view Step 4 gt Using both hands simultaneously press the hand held remote control button 6 and the desired signal trans mitter button or Do not release the buttons until step 5 is com pleted The indicator lamp Q will flash first slowly and then rapidly The indicator lamp 4 flashes immedi ately the first time
166. ctable hardtop before continuing to drive gt page 256 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Wind screen i Make sure the lower wind screen edging is inserted through the gap between the storage compartment and the rear panel Warning A N The wind screen can restrict the driver s vision to the rear of the vehicle To prevent a possible accident when visibility is limited gt Close snap fasteners 2 by pushing in e g in darkness the upper part of the wind handle cap screen should be folded back Po8 00 408231 B Pull wind screen Q on molding over 6 Handle cap roll bars Pull the wind screen edging not on the Installing netting itself gt Remove wind screen 1 from its stor age bag and unfold Removing The storage bag is located on the wall gt Pull off wind screen from roll bars behind the seat backrests gt Open snap fasteners 2 by pulling out gt Attach supporting straps to fasten handle cap 6 ing pins gt Loosen supporting straps 3 from fas tening pins 4 1 Wind screen al 2 Snap fastener with handle cap gt Fold wind screen Q and put it back Supporting strap into storage bag 4 Fastening pin Gap Controls in detail Driving systems The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages e Cruise control with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed The BAS ABS and ESP driving systems are descri
167. ctivat ed With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position W or Mg the low beam headlamps are switched on when the en gine is running In low ambient light conditions the follow ing lamps will switch on additionally e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime run ning lamp mode see Lighting gt page 110 Controls in detail Control system 5 0 For safety reasons resetting all the functions of all submenus to the facto ry settings while driving gt page 134 will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode The following message appears in the multifunction display Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving Locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehi cle is unlocked with the SmartKey e Parking lamps Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approxi mately 40 seconds gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button Ja or Ref repeatedly until you see Function S
168. d Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come into contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does imme diately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery Warning A N Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an acci dent Never loosen or detach battery termi nal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be se verely damaged Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Maintenance Booklet for main tenance intervals or contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Practical hints Battery Disconnecting the battery A Warning With a disconnected battery e you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch e automatic transmission the gear se lector lever will remain locked in position P LE m 1 Water tray 2 Lock vY v V V V Yy Pull up parking brake lever firmly and move gear selector lever to position P manual transm
169. d lamp cleaning system gt page 315 Brake fluid T If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Noti fy an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Practical hints gt page 363 For information on brake fluid see Fuels coolants lubricants etc gt page 449 Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality For more information on coolant see Coolant gt page 313 and Fuels cool ants lubricants etc gt page 449 Engine oil level For information on engine oil see Engine oil gt page 308 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For more information on vehicle lighting see Replacing bulbs gt page 400 For information on switching on the exteri or lighting see Exterior lamp switch page 110 Tire inflation pressure For information on tire inflation pressure see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 328 Vv Engine compartment Hood gt Pull hood lock release lever Q in direc tion of arrow Warning AN The hood is unlocked To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the wi
170. d windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part S to 100 parts solvent 40 ml 1 34 fl oz S to 1 gallon 4 I solvent ABS Antilock Brake System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Accessory weight gt page 344 Air pressure gt page 344 AIRSCARF neck level heating AIRSCARF neck level heating provides the surrounding area of the occupants necks with a heated air stream flowing from openings in the head restraints Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub Aspect ratio gt page 344 BabySmart air bag deactivation system This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is installed on the passenger seat The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag when such a seat is properly installed the indicator lamp located in the center console comes on and remains illuminated BabySmart compatible child seats Special restraint system for children The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the pas senger front air bag if a BabySmart compatible child seat is installed See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability Bar gt page 344 Technical terms BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency brakin
171. d Mercedes Benz Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abra sions or other injuries resulting from air bag deployment Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N Only use seat covers which have been test ed and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the head thorax airbags Contact your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for availabil ity When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Safety and Security Occupant safety Front air bags 1 Driver s air bag 2 Passenger air bag 3 Kneebag passenger side 4 Kneebag driver s side Driver and passenger air bags are de ployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the head thorax air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protect ed by
172. d buttons and If you can no longer lock or unlock the You can unlock and open the trunk lid sep simultaneously for about 6 seconds Battery check lamp flashes twice The SmartKey is set to the factory set ting again vehicle with the SmartKey then the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the SmartKey is malfunction ing or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if nec essary gt page 398 e Use the mechanical key to lock un lock the driver s door gt page 394 e Use the mechanical key to lock un lock the trunk lid as required gt page 395 e Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked gt page 421 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arately gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid unlocks For opening the trunk see Opening the trunk gt page 98 The trunk lid can only be opened when the vehicle is not in motion and the re tractable hardtop is fully opened or closed Checking the batteries gt Press button or al Battery check lamp comes on brief ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter les are in order If battery check lamp G does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged e Replace the batteries gt page 398 You can obtain the required batteries at any authoriz
173. d cir cumstances require you to do so on a hill place the wheel chock and the other size able object as follows gt Place the wheel chock and another sizeable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on Practical hints Flat tire Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into either side of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from P40 10 3491 31 P40 10 3699 31 the area under the lifted vehicle Always Wheel wrench 2 Jack firmly set parking brake and block wheels 3 Take up bracket before raising vehicle with jack gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts in direc Place jack 2 on firm ground tion of arrow approximately one full turn with wheel wrench Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use es gt Position jack 2 under take up bracket 3 so that it is always vertical pecially on hills Always try to use the jack The jack take up brackets are located di plumb line as seen from the side on level surface Be sure the jack armis fully rectly behind the front wheel housings and even if the vehicle is parked on
174. d engine oil gt page 312 and check the engine oil level gt page 308 The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Engine oil level stop engine off Engine oil level Visit workshop Engine oil level Reduce oil level Engine oil Visit workshop Possible cause consequence SLK 55 AMG only There is no oil in the engine There is a danger of engine damage SLK 55 AMG only The measuring system is malfunc tioning SLK 55 AMG only You have added too much engine oil There is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter SLK 55 AMG only There may be water in the engine oil Possible solution gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible Turn off the engine gt Add engine oil gt page 312 and check the engine oil level gt page 308 Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have oil siphoned or drained off Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal Have the engine oil checked Display symbol ii Display message Fuel reserve Check gas cap See Operator s Manual Lock retractable roof Retractable roof Visit workshop Close hood Replace key Possible c
175. d rating special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating G gt page 338 Index Speed rating Q M S upto 100 mph 160 km h T M S upto 118 mph 190 km h H M S up to 130 mph 210 km h V M S up to 149 mph 240 km h 1 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or M S M for winter tires or reinforced tire Not all M S rated tires provide special Load identification C D E designates load range associated winter performance Make sure the with the maximum load a tire can carry at Light Load designates a light load tire tires you use show M S and the moun o a specified pressure tain snowflake marking on the For illustration purposes only Actual tire sidewall These tires meet specific data on tires are specific to each vehi snow traction performance require cle and may vary from data shown in ments of the Rubber Manufacturers above illustration Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates effo
176. damage the plastic lamp lenses of the snaps into place headlamps Therefore do not use abra p Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a sives solvents or cleaners that contain S Tureeombination swici towiver clean cloth and detergent solution solvents setting Il gt page 56 gt Usea clean cloth and window cleaning Never apply strong force and use only a solution on all outside and inside glass gt With wiper arms in vertical position soft non scratchy cloth when cleaning nee switch off the ignition gt page 36 the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recom mended gt D Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface Operation Vehicle care gt E p Rear window cleaning Light alloy wheels To clean the window interior do not Clean the rear window with the hardtop If possible clean wheels once a week use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or fully raised and closed cleaners containing solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or A gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care a soft bristle brush and a strong ing i i side windows with hard objects such as ei ia POP OPAN SGAE an ice scraper or ring Doing so ma l p 8 8 y Do not clean the rear window with the hard damage the windows m l T top in a position other than the fully raised and closed pos
177. depth approaches Wie in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply re duced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely 1 TWI Tread Wear Indicator The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Operation Tires and wheels Storing tires Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Cleaning tires Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Operation Tires and wheels Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advan tages such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable tempo rary use restrictions and speed limita tions indicated on the spare wheel Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry e The Tire and Loading Information placard Example A o
178. dicator was inadvertently reset have an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper maintenance service as called for by the maintenance service indica tor will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Vv Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle AN Warning Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Never use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external in fluences which if gone unchecked can at tack the paintwork as well as the undercarriage and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by ex treme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e far e Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should imme diately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adve
179. dio menu 8 seconds after the last button is pressed Returning volume distribution to factory settings gt Press RJ button to call up settings menu in the display P82 60 4452 31 gt Press RES soft key briefly the respective volume distribution is reset to its center flat level or gt Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display The volume distribution settings for the balance is set to the center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 4 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Telephone muting If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used Controls in detail Audio system Radio operation Selecting radio mode gt Press button Calling up wavebands You can choose from among the FM AM and WB wavebands Weather band gt page 213 1 O FM waveband AM waveband 87 7 107 9 MHz 930 1710 KHz Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT Calling up wavebands for radios with SAT Selecting a station The following options are available for gt Press FM or AM soft key to switch gt Press FM AM or WB soft key repeatedly selecting a station or between FM and AM The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another Press WB soft ke
180. display PIN entry P82 60 4464 31 gt Enter PIN number using buttons EEE to E gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt Press OK soft key after entering correct PIN gt READY or ROAMING will appear in the display If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times NEED PUK will appear in the display Enter PUK via your telephone Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more information Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button during a telephone call The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode Adjusting sound gt Adjust sound during a telephone call Sound adjustment gt page 207 Controls in detail Audio system Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process PH 60 4556 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using buttons J to Rg The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in the display gt D Controls in detail Audio system gt gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number g
181. dition applicable motor vehicle safety laws require you to wear seat belts Even where this is not the case we strongly rec ommend that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly For more information see Fastening the seat belts gt page 47 For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and re straint systems for infants and chil dren see Children in the vehicle gt page 75 Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passenger is properly restrained even pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passenger should al ways wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You co
182. door unlock Tele Aid 280 Retractable hardtop 397 Selector lever unlocking manually 396 Unlocking locking the vehicle 394 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Emission control 302 436 Engine Cleaning see Vehicle care Compartment 307 Driving after replacement 292 Number 436 458 Technical data 438 Turning off 61 43 148 Engine oil 308 451 Adding 312 Additives 451 Checking level Control system 309 Checking level Dipstick 311 Consumption 308 Display message 310 Viscosity 458 ESP 84 458 Display message 371 Warning lamp 365 ETD 73 74 459 Safety guidelines 68 Seat belt force limiter 74 Exterior lamp switch 110 Exterior lighting Lamps 401 Replacing bulbs 401 Exterior rear view mirrors see Mirrors F First aid kit 388 Flat tire 408 Inflating collapsible spare tire 417 Lifting vehicle 413 Lowering vehicle 419 Mounting spare wheel 412 415 TIREFIT kit 408 Floormat Driver s side only 271 Fog lamps 113 401 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 115 Footwell lighting 118 FSS PLUS Canada vehicles 459 Control system 350 Fuel Additives 453 Consumption statistics Control system 149 Filler flap 304 Fuel tank capacity 450 MON 304 Premium unleaded gasoline 304 452 Refueling 304 Reserve warning lamp 365 366 RON 304 Technical data 449 Fuel filler flap Localization 25 Fuel gauge Instrument cluster 25 Fuse extractor Vehicle tool kit 388 Fuses 430 Auxiliary fuse box 432 Main fuse box 431 Spare
183. driver front air bag inflates Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos sible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied Occupants especially children should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag in flates This could result in serious inju ries or death should the air bag be triggered Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and appropri ately sized infant or child restraint sys tem Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the vehicle to deacti vate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fa tal injury will result Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injuries to you or other occu pants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety in formation Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manual Warning A N Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the passenger seat of your vehicle you must properly use a BabySmart child restraint which will turn off the passenger front air bag BabySmart w
184. ds the wiper arm Simultaneously press tabs together and let the wiper blade engage into both recesses of attachment 3 Check if the wiper blade is securely fastened Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm when folding it back Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make sure the wiper blades are proper ly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience you should have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Flat tire The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package is equipped with a TIREFIT kit Preparing the vehicle gt Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead po sition Set the parking brake gt page 52 Move the gear selector lever to P manual transmission to first or reverse gear Turn off the engine gt page 61 Sealing tires with TIREFIT Remove the SmartKey from the starter switc
185. e If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your ve hicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such no tices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not higher than 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 85 before setting the vehicle in motion This will improve the vehi cle s traction Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains e Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations e Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac turer s mounting instructions Operation Winter driving Only use snow chains that are ap proved by Mercedes Benz Your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Use of snow chains may be proh
186. e the call The COMAND navigation sys tem if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken com mands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit A pop up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress After the Tele Aid call has ended the optional cellular phone switches on again A PIN entry might be necessary Initially after switching on ignition mal functions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button Pq and the Information button stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on The message Malfunction Drive to workshop appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display A If the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button do not come on dur ing the system self check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and or the message Malfunction Drive to workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check a malfunction in the system has been detected Warning If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as ex pected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatical ly following an acciden
187. e any excess pressure gt Continue turning cap 2 counterclock wise and remove it The coolant level is correct if the level e for cold coolant reaches marking bar 3 in expansion tank 1 e for warm coolant is approximately 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher gt Add coolant as required gt Replace and tighten cap 2 For more information on coolant see Coolants gt page 453 Battery Your vehicle s battery is located in the en gine compartment The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated ser vice life Refer to the Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently When replacing the battery always use batteries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe gt gt Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary Wear eye protection Keep children away Follow the instructions in
188. e brake pedal Move gear selector lever to position D to drive forward or to position R to drive rearward Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal During the brief warm up transmission upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature Warning A N Vehicles with automatic transmission It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position ey High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher gt Pushcombination switch in direction of arrow 1 The high beam headlamp indicator lamp EDJ in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 110 Getting started Driving Turn sig
189. e by turning the crank P40 10 3495 31 counterclockwise until vehicle is rest l gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly in ing fully on its own weight the direction of the arrow following the gt Remove the jack diagonal sequence illustrated 1 to until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm gt D P40 10 3494 31 1 Wheel bolts b gt Practical hints Flat tire Warning A N Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Fully collapse the jack Place the vehicle tool kit electric air pump and the jack back in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor Wrap the damaged wheel in the protec tive sheet provided with the spare wheel and put the wheel in the trunk The flat tire may be transported in the trunk when the retractable hardtop is closed Y Battery The battery is located in the engine com partment on the right hand side below the windshield washer fluid reservoir 1 Battery 2 Positive terminal 3 Negative terminal Warning A N Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injury or death Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries see Battery gt page 314 Never lean over batteries while connecting them as you could otherwise be injure
190. e cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories ap proved by us are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information also on permissible technical modifications and where proper installation will be per formed Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will be
191. e driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and memory position switch are located on the outer side of each seat p P54 25 355 31 1 Memory button M 2 Memory position switch gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 or gt Open the respective door Controls in detail Memory function Storing positions into memory gt Adjust the seat on the driver s side also the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to the desired posi tions gt page 38 Press memory button M Q Release memory button M and press a memory position switch 2 within 3 seconds All settings are stored to the selected position Recalling positions from memory Do not operate the power seats using the memory position switches if the seat backrest is in an excessively re clined position Doing so could cause damage to the seats gt Press and hold desired memory posi tion switch 2 until the seat on the driver s side also the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have completely moved to the stored posi tions Releasing the memory position switch es immediately stops movement to the stored positions Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position parking aid For easier parking you can adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as y
192. e including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressure is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ibs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ibs 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim Operation Tires and wheels PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended
193. e instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes Benz audio system They con tain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions Warning A N In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road and traffic conditions permit Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Controls in detail Audio system Operating safety Warning A N Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions The radio amplifier CD changer satellite radio and telephone are interconnected When one of the components is not opera tional or has not been removed replaced properly the function of other components may be impaired This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center o Audio system Operating and display elements a 0 0 Hs ioW ae E HRR 0 0 0 P 41 3374 31 ovo HOG Item CD changer mode selector Sin
194. e not facing the wind A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose In dicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Warning For more information see Winter driving gt page 348 Standing water Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equip ment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing wa ter drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such dam age is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Passenger compartment AN Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible Warning In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob jects Driving abroad Abroad
195. e selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Schneider press button four times Press and hold button W or BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button W or FAM until desired initial letter has been reached gt Press button WN or Bg repeatedly until desired entry has been reached The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub entries Several sub entries can be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left hand corner of the display The following abbreviations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobile phone HOM Home WOR Work FAX Fax PAG Pager TEL Main LLR Controls in detail Audio system gt When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Viewing the telephone number of a phone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display Returning calls received MUM ROU P82 60 4467 31 Controls in detail Audio system Press MEM soft key or press button WY or BA Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or
196. e with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide un der the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 47 Never place hands under the seat or near moving parts while the seat is being adjusted Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the power seats can be op erated when the respective door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning J Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will r
197. eadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only var in 1 6 mm of tread remains Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 Ibs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Rotating tires AN Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension Warning If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 320 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is n
198. eated position and to wear their seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and ensure it is properly posi tioned on your body Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest gt D b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward still permitting proper opera tion of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and the steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dash board Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel rim Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when
199. ecommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner s manual The recommended tire inflation pres sures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the drivers door B pillar gt page 321 The tire in flation pressures are not listed in the owner s manual Warning A N The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pres sure according to the placard on the driver s door B pillar or fuel filler flap The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg ular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning A N Follow recommend tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely
200. ecreasing gt Turn temperature control 1 and or gt page 179 slightly counterclockwise The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air distribution Turn the air distribution control to the Opening the center air vents E EE ae ao i Pde ie gt Turn thumbwheels and Use air distribution control l Se E The climate control system will corre gt page 178 upward to the first stop gt page 179 to adjust the air distribution a ee spondingly adjust the interior air distri Center air vents and are The following symbols are found on the bution e control E oo oe gt Turn thumbwheels G and Symbol Function You can also turn the control to a gt page 178 upward all the way Directs air through the position between two symbols LJ Only center air vents and are center and side air vents open Directs air to the windows and through the center and side air vents Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells and through the center and side air vents Closing the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 178 downward all the way Center air vents 4 7 and Q are closed Opening and closing side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels Q and 2 gt page 178 in the required direction Side air vents 2 and Q are open
201. ective device in other situations Controls in detail Useful features Reprogramming a single signal trans mitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button or Do not release the button gt The indicator lamp Q will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releas ing the signal transmitter button pro ceed with programming starting with step 3 Controls in detail Useful features Operation of integrated remote control Erasing the integrated remote control Programming tips gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 itis i If you are having difficulty programming gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 the integrated remote control here are gt Select and press the appropriate inte some helpful tips grated signal transmitter button gt Simultaneously press and hold down 3 or 4 to activate the remote con the outer signal transmitter buttons Check the frequency of the hand held trolled device and 4 for approximately 20 seconds remote control typically located on The integrated remote control trans until the indicator lamp flashes rap the reverse side of the remote The in mitter continues to send the signal as idly Do not hold for longer than tegrated remote control Is compatible 30 seconds
202. ed Mercedes Benz Center If the batteries are checked within sig nal range of the vehicle pressing button or will lock or un lock the vehicle accordingly Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key to your car insurance company immediately gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so 1 Inside door handle 2 Locking knob gt Pull on door handle Q of the desired door If the door was locked locking knob 2 will move up bb Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If the vehicle has previously been cen trally locked with the SmartKey open ing a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the fol lowing e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed The side windows
203. ed by the shift program This action simulta neously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 160 To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Upshifting gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simul taneously extends the gear range of the transmission Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting The steering wheel gearshift control pro vides an alternative method for changing the gears manually and limiting or extend ing the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting with ste
204. ee Children in the vehicle gt page 75 The H indicator lamp in the speedome ter dial gt page 24 comes on e for about 4 seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 It then goes out briefly comes on again and remains lit until you start the engine e forabout 4 seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey The EGS indicator lamp remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to position 2 and left there The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine The EGS indicator lamp goes out shortly after you start the engine This shows that the restraint systems are operational A malfunction in the system has been de tected if the EJ indicator lamp e fails to extinguish after approximately 4 seconds with the SmartKey in the starter switch position 1 e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started e comes on while driving For safety reasons we strongly recom mend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked For more information see Practical hints gt page 366 Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags Warning A N In the event that the indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the syst
205. een the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin ning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers The ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer dial flashes when the ESP is en gaged The ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer dial comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Warning A N Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the speedometer dial In this case proceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents result ing from excessive speed Warning A N The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ESP equipped ve
206. ehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive en gine speeds no more than ye of max imum rpm in each gear e During this period avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle gear down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever All of the above instructions as may apply e Shift gears in a timely manner to your vehicle type also apply when driv e Avoid accelerating by kickdown ing the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear differential has been e Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when i replaced driving at moderate speeds for hill driving Q e Select C as the preferred shift program Always obey applicable speed limits gt page 163 for the first 1000 miles 1500 km Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent de pends on driving habits and operating con ditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended infla tion pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration e Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the maintenance service indicator Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz
207. ehicle safety DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization and or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel At a glance Cockpit P68 10 3396 31 OVa Item Automatic transmission Steering wheel gearshift control SLK 55 AMG Steering wheel gearshift control Multifunction steering wheel Horn Instrument cluster Overhead control panel Glove box Center console Sun sensor for automatic climate control Starter switch Page 165 167 26 124 24 120 30 117 266 28 29 36 Item Steering wheel adjustment handle manual Steering wheel adjustment lever electrical Heated steering wheel SLK 280 SLK 350 Canada only Headlamp cleaning switch Hood lock release Exterior lamp switch Combination switch e Turn signals e Windsh
208. elines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and Air bags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts front air bags kneebags or side impacts head thorax air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only during these types of impacts if of sufficient severity to meet the deploy ment thresholds will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passenger should al ways wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to pro vide their supplemental protection In cases of other frontal impacts an gled impacts roll overs other side im pacts rear collisions or other accidents the air bags will not be acti vated The driver and the passenger will then be protected by the fastened seat belts ence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt Your vehicle was originally equipped with air bags that are designed to acti vate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the poten tial and severity of injury It is important to your safety and that of your passen gers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protec tion for occupants air bag Warning A N Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use belts in stalled or supplied by
209. em checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an acci dent which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury In addition improper work on the SRS cre ates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be per formed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury in certain frontal impacts front air bags kneebags or side impacts head thorax air bags which may cause sig nificant injuries However no system avail able today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The activation of the air bags temporarily re leases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither inju rious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for peo ple with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Warning A N To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and passenger to always be in a prop erly s
210. em dials the selected phone number If the connection is successful the du ration of the call will appear in the mul tifunction display and e the name ofthe party if stored in the phone book or e instead of it the dialed number Cancel the call you have intended to make by pressing button fan Y Manual transmission Manual transmission is standard equip ment on select models and not available on all models For information on driving with a manual transmission see Manual transmission gt page 51 Warning A N For vehicles equipped with a manual trans mission getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in first or re verse gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous Also when parked on an incline an engaged first or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging first or reverse gear gt page 59 When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Controls in detail Manual transmission Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave childre
211. em is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel To raise press button and to lower press button EE or use the volume knob on your audio system or COMAND head unit Controls in detail Useful features gt To activate press the SOS button the System self check Roadside Assistance button or the Information button B depend ing on the type of response required The SOS button is located in the over head control panel The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located below the center armrest cov er The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satel lites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be sum moned by other means When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the audio system or COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode radio tape or CD pauses The optional cellular phone if installed and insert ed in cradle switches off If you must use this phone we recommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Remove the phone from the cradle and plac
212. ember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear A All categories of messages contain impor tant information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated ad dressed as soon as possible at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Warning Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property dam age or personal injury Warning A N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction dis play is inoperative Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Switching on ignition gt page 36 causes all instrument cluster lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated as well as the multi function display to come on Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey Practical hints What to do if On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warn ing and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections e Text messages gt page 370 e Symbol messages gt page 374 Practical hints What to do if Text messages Display message ABS Cruise
213. enance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica tion other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System U S vehi cles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change inter vals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty we SLK 55 AMG SLK 350 example 4 Filler cap C Filler cap gt Unscrew filler cap Q from filler neck gt Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw filler cap Q back on filler neck For more information on engine oil see Technical data gt page 449 and gt page 451 Operation Engine compartment Transmission fluid level Coolant level EE E s Using a rag slowly open the cap approx imately 1 2 turn to relieve ex
214. ent of the trailer weight and every thing loaded in it Your Mercedes Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo Mercedes Benz does not recom mend trailer towing with your vehicle Recommended tire inflation pressure ZN Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 321 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort In addition to the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the fuel f
215. enz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care products Power washer Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on main taining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connec tors seals or other rubber parts Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Affixing stickers adhesive tape or sim ilar materials to painted body compo nents may damage the paintwork Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months de pending on the climate and washing deter gent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot gt Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisi
216. er 1 and press release button 2 gt Push parking brake lever Q down to its original position The brake warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the speedometer dial goes out Driving Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake ap pears in the multifunction display when driving off you have forgotten to re lease the parking brake Getting started Simultaneously depressing the acceler ator pedal and the brake pedal reduces engine performance and causes pre mature brake and drivetrain wear Once the vehicle is in motion the auto matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down For more information see Automatic central locking gt page 101 Getting started Driving Manual transmission gt gt gt Depress the brake pedal Fully depress the clutch pedal Move gearshift lever to first gear to drive forward or to reverse gear to drive rearward Simultaneously release the brake pedal and slowly the clutch pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal Automatic transmission Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion Depress th
217. er part of the center console 1 AIRSCARF switch driver s side shown 2 Indicator lamps Controls in detail Seats A Warning When switching on the AIRSCARF neck level heating the air streaming from the openings may be very hot When in close proximity to the openings you could be seriously burned To help avoid serious personal injuries switch the AIRSCARF to a lower heating level Controls in detail Seats Red indicator lamps 2 on the AIRSCARF switches show which heating level you have selected Level 3 Three indicator lamps on highest heating level 2 Two indicator lamps on 1 One indicator lamp on lowest heating level off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Switching on gt Press the respective AIRSCARF switch for the desired side All three indicator lamps on the respec tive AIRSCARF switch come on After a preheating time of approximately 7 seconds the blower starts Press the respective AIRSCARF switch repeatedly until the desired AIRSCARF heating level for the corresponding seat is reached gt Switching off Press the respective AIRSCARF switch repeatedly until all indicator lamps on the AIRSCARF switch go out After switching off the AIRSCARF neck level heating the AIRSCARF fan continues to operate for approximately 10 seconds to cool down the heater elements a If one or more of indicator lamps 2
218. er uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to ad just settings Cruise control Driving convenience system for auto matically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver Curb weight gt page 344 DOT Department of Transportation gt page 344 Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine pro duced Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction vis cosity of the oil at different tempera tures The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin or the lower the temperature it can tol erate without becoming viscous the better the viscosity ESP Electronic Stability Program Improves vehicle handling and direc tional stability ETD Emergency Tensioning Device Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the sys tem s threshold to tighten the seat belts gt SRS FSS PLUS Canada vehicles Flexible Service System PLUS Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due FSS PLUS evalu ates engine temperature oil level vehicle speed engine speed distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accord ingly GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating gt page 344 Gear r
219. eration Driving instructions Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis sions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our rec ommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic converters use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Warning A N As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Emission control Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments on the engine should therefore only be carried out by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified servi
220. ering wheel gearshift buttons the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail Automatic transmission Steering wheel gearshift control SLK 280 SLK 350 The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel 1 Button inside downshift 2 Button outside upshift Controls in detail Automatic transmission You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P N or R The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted Downshifting Upshifting gt Briefly press the outside 2 of one of Warning A N the buttons on the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmis sion On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could r
221. ermittent wiping Vehicles with rain sensor Do not leave windshield wipers in inter mittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during wind shield cleaning Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and wind shield wipers may be damaged as a result Vehicles with rain sensor Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield gt Turn the combination switch to position I Vehicles with rain sensor After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened This helps to avoid people being sprayed with water from wiper action when getting into and out of the vehicle Intermittent wiping will be continued when e all doors are closed and e the clutch pedal is depressed vehi cles with manual transmission or e the gear selector lever is in position D or R vehicles with auto matic transmission or e the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Getting started Single wipe gt Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Q to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer fluid gt Press the combination switch in direc tion of arrow Q past the resistance point The windsh
222. erous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually gt gt Closing Warning A N Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone gt Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft 30 cm The hood will lock audibly gt Check to make sure the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period Do not use any special lubricant addi tives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty More information on this subject is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Checking engine oil level with the control system SLK 55 AMG only When checking the oil level e the vehicle must be parked on level ground e with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle m
223. erse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected e Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower roms and the wheels are less likely to spin Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually and limit or extend the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitt
224. ese materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Pull the parking brake lever up as many notches as possible e Move the selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear e Slowly release brake pedal When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving Set the parking brake whenever park ing or leaving the vehicle In addition place gear selector lever in position P manual transmission move gearshift lever to first or reverse gear In addition when parking on hills turn front wheel towards the road curb Tires AN If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning Inspect the tires and the vehicle undercar riage for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs Treadwear indicators TWI are required
225. esent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning A N The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure Operation Tires and wheels Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Operation Tires and wheels Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage Bar Another metric unit fo
226. ess and leaks Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution Eiaa USA only The yellow engine There is a malfunction in gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible ay Canada only aati er e the fuel management system by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center AmE a OS ere An on board diagnostic connector is used by driving e the ignition system the service station to link the vehicle to the e the emission control system shop diagnostics system It allows the accu e systems which affect emissions rate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes It is located in the front left area of the footwell near the hood release Such malfunctions may result in ex cessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp home emergency operation mode Your fuel tank is empty gt After refueling start turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked Additionally you see A loss
227. ess on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rom limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Effect The transmission shifts through sixth gear only The transmission shifts through fifth gear only The transmission shifts through fourth gear only Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Controls in detail Automatic transmission Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Stopping Working on the vehicle When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear Warning AN gt
228. estraint system may use ve hicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury BabySmart air bag deactivation system Q indicator lamp Safety and Security Occupant safety Special BabySmart compatible child seats designed for use with the Mercedes Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmart air bag deactivation system With the spe cial child seat properly installed the pas senger front air bag will not deploy The indicator lamp will be il luminated except with the SmartKey re moved or in starter switch position 0O The system does not deactivate the head thorax air bag and the ETD emer gency tensioning device Safety and Security Occupant safety Self test BabySmart without special child seat installed After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 the indicator lamp comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then goes out If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit the sys tem is not functioning You must see an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat For more information see Practical hints gt page 367 Warning A N The BabySmart air bag deactivation sys tem will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmart com
229. esult Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmart compatible in fant or child restraint system which is prop erly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Adjusting T Seat fore and aft adjustment When moving the seats make sure p gt Pull handle there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats Otherwise you could Slide the seat to the desired position damage the seats Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that allows you to reach the Manual seat adjustment accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far rearward as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls gt Allow handle Q to reengage with an audible click gt Check for proper engagement before driving y F0 2612 31 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat height 3 Backrest tilt Getting started Adjusting Seat height gt Pull or push handle 2 up or down and adjust the seat height until your legs are slightly supported Backrest tilt gt Pull handle 3 and adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel gt
230. esult in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control gt Briefly press the inside of one of the buttons on the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 160 Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the outside 2 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range p gt Press and hold the inside Q of one of the buttons on the steering wheel The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears Steering wheel gearshift control SLK 55 AMG The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel 1 Left button downshift 2 Right button upshift Controls in detail Automatic transmission You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P N or R The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode The following instructions describe opera tion of the steering w
231. et date year in the mul tifunction display unit feature was set to Off gt page 139 tifunction display The selection marker is on the day I 0O The selection marker is on the year D Gat dale Vehicles with COMAND s D Sok date day For information on setting the time in year 6 COMAND refer to the separate 5 06y 2005 COMAND operating instructions 06 28 Ge P54 32 3516 31 P54 32 3517 31 gt Press button or E to set the gt Press button or E to set the day year Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu Use the Lighting sub menu to change the lamp and lighting set tings on your vehicle The following functions are available Function Page Daytime running lamp mode 143 USA only Locator lighting 144 Night security illumination 145 Interior lighting delayed shut off 146 Daytime running lamp mode USA only I This function is not available in coun tries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button J or Ref repeatedly until you see Lamp circuit headlamp mode in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting s Lamp circuit headlamp mode d constant P54 32 2748 31 Controls in detail Control system gt Press button or E to select manual operation manual or daytime running lamp mode constant a
232. everal unsuccessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery gt Warning A N Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 314 Make sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn off all electrical consumers Apply parking brake Shift gear selector lever to position P manual transmission to Neutral Open the hood gt page 307 Flip up cover from positive under hood terminal 2 in front of water tray gt page 422 1 Positive terminal of charged battery 2 Positive under hood terminal in front of water tray 3 Negative under hood terminal in front of water tray 4 Negative terminal of charged battery gt Connect positive terminal 1 of the charged battery with positive under hood terminal 2 in front of the water tray with one jumper cable Clamp the cable to positive terminal of the charged battery first Never invert the terminal connections gt Practical hints Jump starting Start the engine of the vehic
233. ey are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc MOExtended system The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires You may only use the MOExtended system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator The maximum distance in emergency mode depends on the vehicle s load It is 30 miles 50 km if the vehicle is par tially loaded and 18 miles 30 km if the vehicle is fully loaded The point at which the maximum driv ing distance begins in emergency mode is when the warning message appears in the multifunction display indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h Warning A N In emergency mode your vehicle s driving characteristics are diminished in such situa tions as e driving around curves e while braking e while accelerating rapidly Therefore your driving style must be adapt ed accordingly Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles road curbs potholes or off road areas This is especially important if the ve hicle is heavily loaded The emergency driving distance that can be achieved greatly depends on the demands placed on the vehicle Depending on speed load driving maneuvers road conditions outside temperature etc the distance can be significantly shorter or if the vehicle
234. f outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure In the event that the closing procedure caus es potential danger the closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by re leasing the button or by pressing the respective power window switch The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the button If you press button and keep it pressed the side windows will close The closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by releasing button RJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out o The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside tem perature Is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air condition ing is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside tem perature is above approximately 41 F 5 C If you press button and keep it pressed the side windows will open The opening of the side windows can be immediately halted by releasing button Ey Air conditioning The cooling function only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle interior down to the selected tempera ture The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior thus preventing the windows from fogging up a Condensation may drip from under neath the ve
235. f the memory position but tons or the memory button M gt page 107 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until you see Function Easy entry feature in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting AS Function Easy entry feature off e P54 32 3348 31 Press button or E to set the function to On or Off Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Use this function to select whether the passenger side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is en gaged For additional information see Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position parking aid gt page 108 gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see Mirror adjustment Parking aidin the multifunction dis play The selection marker is on the current setting af Mirror adjustment 2 Parking aid On S P54 32 2755 31 gt Press button or E to set the function to On or Off Trip computer menu Use the trip computer
236. failure Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B Operation Tires and wheels o Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Load lim it data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illus trations below Refer to placard on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Placard Example A a TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never enceed XXN kg or XXX Ibs rme sue comae raessure paR MANUAL FOR REAR P195 70RI 200KPA 29P51 ADDITIONAL soil P40 00 2062 31 Z00KPA 29PSi 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Operation Tires and wheels Loading Information placard Example A locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Placard Example B o gt VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION EHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHTS KG MELB VERICLE SEA
237. find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually j brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the checked by a qualified technician atthe Driving with the message Brake fluid a a ae minimum mark or below have the intervals specified in the Maintenance Visit workshop displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system brake system checked for brake pad Booklet thickness and leaks Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Coolant stop engine off During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Possible cause conse Possible solution quence The poly V belt could be gt Stop the vehicle and immediately turn off the engine oroi an gt Check the poly V belt gt page 437 If it is broken gt Donot continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in dam age to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is in order gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message dis played Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited W
238. fla tion Exercise proper caution to avoid burning yourself when using the equip ment Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 6 minutes without interrup tion Otherwise it may overheat You may operate the electric air pump again after it has cooled off Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2 to position O The electric air pump should now be switched off If the tire inflation pressure is above 51 psi 3 5 bar release excess tire in flation pressure using the vent screw on air hose 4 Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Detach the electric air pump Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap Store electrical plug and air hose behind flap and place the electric air pump back in the trunk gt Lower the vehicle gt page 419 Practical hints Flat tire Lowering the vehicle Warning A N Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump gt page 417 before lowering the ve hicle gt Lower vehicl
239. front air bag when it is properly installed Other wise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury can result Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmart compatible in fant or child restraint system which is prop erly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt Children too big for child restraint systems should use regular seat belts Position the shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be neces sary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits proper ly without a booster A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint When the child restraint is not in use re move it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an ac cident Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Unsupervised chil dren in a child r
240. ft or right turn only the re spective turn signals will operate when the SmartKey is in the starter switch position 1 or 2 Switching off hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch Q again If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting The controls are located in the overhead control panel 1 Interior lighting on off 2 Automatic control on off 3 Right reading lamp on off 4 Left reading lamp on off a Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery Controls in detail Lighting Automatic control Deactivating Manual control o gt Press automatic control switch until a Activating Interior lighting it engages at a deeper position than the gt Press automatic control switch until other switches gt Press interior lighting switch Q it is flush to the other switches The interior lighting remains switched The interior lighting switches on The interior lighting switches on in off in darkness even when you gt Press interior lighting switch again darkness when you ntng O ag a Clee Kong HEMI The interior lighting switches off Mock NE VERIGE e remove the SmartKey from the e remove the SmartKey from the starter switc
241. ft tail lamp brake lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working A backup bulb has been brought into use The right tail lamp brake lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working A backup bulb has been brought into use Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on The left front fog lamp is malfunc tioning The right front foglamp is malfunc tioning Possible solution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display symbol 10 oe I Display message Rear foglamp Back up lamp on High beam left High beam right Lamp sensor Drive to workshop Left license plate lamp malfunction Right license plate lamp malfunction Possible cause consequence The rear fog lamp on the driver s side is malfunctioning A backup bulb has been brought into use The left high beam lamp halogen headlamps high beam flasher lamp Bi Xenon headlamps is mal functioning The right high beam lamp halogen head
242. ful features Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed in your vehicle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv en at the beginning of each segment For more information on unlocking and locking see gt page 34 and gt page 59 SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ ent color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the trunk lid e the fuel filler flap e the glove box e the storage compartment under the armrest P80 35 2087 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Unlock button for the trunk lid 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 80 Opening a door causes t
243. g situa tions The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bead gt page 344 Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more in tense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam CAC Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service cen ter which can help you with any ques tions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a break down CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control ve hicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passen ger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring Cold tire inflation pressure gt page 344 Collapsible tire An especially compact spare tire that must be inflated with a provided air pump before using It should only be used to bring the vehicle to the nearest service station COMAND Cockpit Management and Data System Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems including the radio CD changer and navigation system as well as other optional equipment e g telephone Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings Information and messages appear in the multifunction display The driv
244. glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to
245. gle CD mode selector Radio mode selector Mute function radio Pause CD Volume distribution Sound settings Display Alphanumeric keypad Page 219 222 212 229 208 207 00 OO Item Speed dialing memory tele phone in descending order Accepting a call telephone Telephone mode selector Speed dialing memory tele phone in ascending order Terminating a call telephone CD slot CD ejection Page 2395 229 231 239 222 Controls in detail Audio system Item Soft keys Volume Switching on off Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search reverse CD Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search fast forward CD Page 206 207 206 211 228 211 228 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation Operation i If the radio is switched on without the In these instructions the alphanumeric switchi h ff Smaken thestarterswiteh wl keypad right side of radio panel and the witching the unit on o y a automatically switch off again after function buttons left side of radio panel chi PORS E e are referred to as buttons The four keys SMITE MINE on PP y l below the display panel are referred toas Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch If your vehicle is equipped with a soft keys to position 1 or 2 gt page 36 telephone the display may prompt you to enter your PIN GSM net
246. gnal lamps do not flash three times one of the following ele ments may not be properly closed e adoor e the trunk lid e the fuel filler flap e the glove box e thestorage compartment under the armrest Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that press ing button only unlocks the driver s door the storage compartment under the armrest the glove box and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds Battery check lamp flashes twice The SmartKey will then function as follows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button once All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob on the driver s door move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed gt page 87 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global unlocking gt Press button twice All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs on the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed gt page 87 Global locking gt Press button BAN With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed now gt page 87 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Restoring to factory setting T Unlocking the trunk lid gt Press and hol
247. gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Deactivating gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e adoor e the trunk lid e the hood e the glove box e the storage compartment in the center console The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle e opening the vehicle with the mechanical key e someone opens a door from the inside someone opens the trunk lid with the emergency release button Safety and Security Anti theft systems The alarm will stay on even if the acti vating element e g a door is immedi ately closed If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 273 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available gt page 273 Safety and Security Anti theft systems Arming the alarm system gt Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey T
248. h i SLK 55 AMG with Performance a Package only Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Warning A N Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Keep TIREFIT away from sparks open flame or heat source Do not smoke Small tire punctures particularly those in the tread can be sealed with TIREFIT TIREFIT can be used in ambient tempera tures down to 4 F 20 C Warning A N TIREFIT is a limited repair device TIREFIT cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger than approx 0 16 in 4 mm and tire dam age caused by driving with extremely low tire inflation pressure or on a flat tire or a damaged wheel Do not drive the vehicle under such circum stances Contact your nearest Mercedes Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside Assistance gt Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire gt Take TIREFIT the sticker and the elec tric air pump out of the trunk gt Attach the sticker where it will be easily seen by the driver on the instrument cluster Warning A N Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled swal lowed or absorbed through the skin causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT change clothing as soon
249. h COMAND For information on setting the time in COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions Controls in detail Control system gt Move the selection marker with Setting the time minutes gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu Press button J or Ref repeatedly until you see Clock hours in the mul tifunction display The selection marker is on the hours 4 Clock hours Set by pressing R f 38pm P54 32 2741 31 Press button or E to set the correct hours displayed in the multi function display Press reset button to confirm the set hours This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND and navigation module if the time and date synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off gt page 139 Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the time in COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions button or E to the Time Date submenu Press button 2 or Ref repeatedly until you see Clock minutes in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the minutes Clock minutes Set by pressing R 7 EE pm P54 32 2742 31 Press button or E to set the correct minutes displayed in the multi function display Press reset button to confirm the set minutes Controls in detail Control system Setting the date month gt Move the selection
250. h a starter switch The footwell lighting is switched on and off simultaneously with the manual ce control When you open the trunk the trunk lighting switches on automatically e open a door e open a door The interior lighting switches off automati cally following a preset time delay For more information see Interior lighting delayed shut off gt page 146 If the trunk lid remains open the trunk lighting switches off automatically after o approximately 10 minutes If the door remains open the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 minutes when the SmartKey is in starter switch position O or removed Reading lamps The standard reading lamps are located to the left and right of the overhead control panel Reading lamps as part of the interior lighting package are located on the lower edge of the interior rear view mirror gt Press reading lamp switch or to switch on the desired reading lamp gt Press reading lamp switch or again to switch off the respective reading lamp Door entry lamps For better orientation in the dark the cor responding door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated The door entry lamps switch off when the corresponding door is closed o If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and switch off the exterior headlamps the door entry lamps wil
251. hanger The Audio system stops playing the CD while another CD is being ejected Once the CD has been ejected the Audio system will continue playing where it left off Close the glove box Controls in detail Audio system Ejecting all loaded CDs gt Open the glove box Press the button of a loaded magazine slot for more than 2 seconds The light emitting diodes in all maga zine slot buttons light up several times in red and ALL EJECT appears in the display The CD changer ejects the CDs one af ter another The light emitting diode for the maga zine slot being emptied flashes in red Take corresponding CD from CD load ing slot within 15 seconds The ejection procedure is finished once you have removed all CDs from the CD loading slot or if the CD changer can cels the procedure With all CDs removed from the maga zine MAG EMPTY appears in the display gt D Controls in detail Audio system If you do not take the CD from the CD loading slot within 15 seconds the CD changer will automatically pull the CD back in The system will then play the CD With all CDs ejected press the button to switch back to the radio mode gt Close the glove box Playing CDs Single CD player in the audio unit gt Press button CDO will appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The CD will resume playback at the point where it was switched off CD changer gt Press butto
252. he automatic transmission will auto matically downshift Vehicles with manual transmission If you depress the clutch pedal when shifting into another gear the engine speed may increase Drive with sufficient engine speed Shift gears in a timely manner If possible do not shift down more than one gear Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel the cruise control gt Step on the brake pedal The cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use or gt Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow gt page 261 The cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine The cruise control switches off auto matically if e you step on the brake pedal e you pull up the parking brake lever firmly e the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h e ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch gt page 84 e Vehicles with manual transmission you depress the clutch pedal for longer than 6 seconds during shift ing into another gear e Vehicles with automatic transmis sion you move the gear selector lever to position N while driving Vehicles with automatic transmission Moving gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control However the gear se lector lever should not be moved to pos
253. he fuse box cover 1 in the dashboard as this could damage it Practical hints Fuses Closing gt Attach cover Q in the front gt Fold cover in until it engages Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located in the engine com partment on the driver s side 2 Clamp 3 Fuse box cover Opening Closing gt Open the hood gt page 307 gt Make sure the sealing rubber is proper ly positioned gt With a dry cloth remove any moisture from the fuse box gt Press fuse box cover 3 down and se gt Release clamps 2 cure with clamps 2 gt Remove fuse box cover 3 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main Dimensions Weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc Technical data Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300 000 different parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subject ed to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed ma
254. he rear view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 45 Interior rear view mirror antiglare position at ma ie P68 00 3999 31 gt Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving the lever towards the windshield The interior rear view mirror is dimmed Controls in detail Good visibility Auto dimming mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirrors and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when e ignition is switched on and e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirrors will not react if e reverse gear R is engaged e interior lighting is switched on Warning A N The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sen sors in the interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example if the wind screen is in stalled Glare can endanger you and others Warning A N In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or the respiratory sys tem In case it does immediately flush af fected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
255. he turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is ac tivated The indicator lamp in the central lock ing switch starts flashing gt page 102 If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times one of the following ele ments may not be properly closed a door the trunk lid the fuel filler flap the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Disarming the alarm system gt Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash once to in dicate that the alarm system is dis armed Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle The tow away protection alarm is trig gered for example if the vehicle is lift ed on one side If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 273 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available gt page 273 Arming tow away alarm gt Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds a
256. he windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the win dows are covered with ice As a result you may no longer be able to properly close the door Do not attempt to force the door shut Doing so may damage the door or the side window Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed the SmartKey signaling range is consider ably reduced Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation Controls in detail Locking and unlocking USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this
257. heel gearshift control when driving in the automatic program mode C or S For instructions on operating the steering wheel gearshift control and gear selector lever in the manual program mode M see Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG page 169 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Downshifting Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control gt Briefly press button 4 on the left side of the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 160 when you are driving in the automatic program mode C or S Upshifting gt Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission when you are driving in the automatic program mode C or S Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold button on the right side of the steering wheel until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold but
258. heels gt P gt Step 6 if applicable gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 326 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s placard gt page 321 Example Combined Numberof Seating weight limit occupants configura of occu driver and tion pants and passengers cargo from placard 1 1500 Ibs 2 2 1500 Ibs 1 1 3 1500 Ibs 1 1 The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 326 Occupants weight Occupant 1 150 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 1 150 Ibs Operation Combined weight of all occupants 330 Ibs 200 Ibs 150 Ibs Tires and wheels Available cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit or vehicle capacity weight from plac ard minus combined weight of all occupants 1500 Ibs 330 Ibs 1170 lbs 1500 Ibs 200 Ibs 1300 Ibs 1500 Ibs 150 Ibs 1350 Ibs
259. heels If you wish to confirm activation gt Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator reactivated After a certain learning phase the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val ues for all four tires If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button EEJ or gt Wait until the message Tire pres now OK disappears Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tire inflation pressure Underinflated tires can e cause excessive and uneven tire wear e adversely affect fuel economy lead to tire failure from being overheated e adversely affect handling characteristics Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Overinflated tire inflation pressure Overinflated tires can e adversely affect handling characteristics e cause uneven tire wear e be more prone to damage from road hazards e adversely affect ride comfort e increase stopping distance Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because th
260. her things beyond the service provider s or our control Service might also not be available in certain places e g in tunnels parking garages or within or next to buildings or near other technologies Program categories The channels are categorized Categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program category mode gt page 216 Calling up the SAT main menu gt Press SAT soft key SAT is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display Prior to activation of the satellite radio service gt page 215 After activation of satellite radio service gt page 215 Prior to activation of the satellite radio service P82 60 4463 31 The telephone number of the SIRIUS service Center 888 539 7474 is displayed gt Press ESN soft key The twelve digit electronic serial number ESN of the SAT tuner installed in your vehicle is displayed This information is required to call the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request Credit card information may also be required for your application The activation process takes approxi mately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center After activation of the satellite radio service The satellite radio main menu appears The radio station selected last is audible provided it can be received Controls in detail Audio system The system will tune to a default station if no sta
261. here fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as semblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for headlamp ad justment If the headlamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity driving the vehicle a short distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging Backup bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction Observe the messages in the multifunction display gt page 382 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Front lamps Rear lamps Lamp Type Lamp Type Q Additional turn signal LED Rear fog lamp drivers P21W lamp side only 2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 9 High mounted brake LED 3 Halogen headlamp lamp Low beam H7 55 W Tail parking standing LED Bi Xenon headlamp side marker lamp and Low and high beam D2S 35W brake lamp Front fog lamp HB4 51 W QD License plate lamps C5W G Parking and standing W5W Backup lamp P21W lamp 3 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 6 Halogen headlamp E High beam high beam i flasher H7 55 W Vehicles equipped with Bi Xenon headlamp corner illuminating front fog lamps E ares High beam flasher H7 55 W Front fog lamps use H7 55 W lamps Side marker lamp W5W 1 Vehicles with Bi Xenon headlamps Low beam and high beam use the same
262. here the temperature is different from the outside temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire in flation pressure Otherwise the tire will be underinflated Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire gt Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve gt Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 327 If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure If you have overfilled the tire release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge Operation Tires and wheels gt Install the valve cap gt Repeat
263. hicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the vehi cle will not be cooled when the weather con ditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 179 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Controls in detail Climate control Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button gt page 179 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer Controls in detail Climate control Maximum cooling gt Turn thumbwheels G and gt page 178 upwards to the first stop The fixed center air vents and gt page 178 and the adjustable air vents 6 and 7 gt page 178 are open For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the center air vents 6 and gt page 178 to the middle position Turn thumbwheels C and 42 gt page 178 for the adjustable side air vents
264. hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the us er s safety or the safety of others The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size gt page 439 Because of the ESP s automatic oper ation the engine must be turned off SmartKey in starter switch position O or 1 when e the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer e the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system For more information see Practical Hints gt page 365 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Switching off the ESP Warning A N The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel with collapsible tire is mounted To improve the vehicle s traction turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as e when driving with snow chains e in deep snow e in sand or gravel Safety and Security Driving safety systems Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore When you switch
265. hin Select desired waveband Fue E stations on the waveband selected the respective waveband gt Press J or E button briefly ae e Ending scan search If a button is not pressed within The radio will tune to the next highest 4 seconds the radio will return to the or next lowest receivable frequency gt Press SC soft key or EEJ or ES last station tuned The station last played will be a l selected and SC disappears from If no station is received after two the display consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began Controls in detail Audio system Station memory You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in the memory e Storing stations gt Tune in desired station gt Press and hold desired station button J to BQH until a brief signal tone is heard The frequency is stored on the selected station button e Calling up stations gt Press desired station button EE to QM briefly Autostore automatic station memory The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten e Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations P82 60 4483 31 gt Press AS soft key briefly The radio switches to the Autostore memory level AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These statio
266. ht side of the retainer and pull out the ashtray insert Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighter Warning A N Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 1 Cigarette lighter gt Push in cigarette lighter Cigarette lighter Q will pop out auto matically when hot Reinsert cigarette lighter Q in its socket after use The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical ac cessories up to a maximum of 85 W designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type Keep in mind however that connecting acces sories to the lighter socket for exam ple extensive connecting and disconnecting or using plugs that do not fit properly can damage the lighter socket With the socket damaged the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating pushed in posi tion or the lighter may pop out too ear ly with the lighter not hot enough To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket we recommend con necting 12V DC electrical assesso
267. ibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires use of snow chains is not permit ted with the collapsible tire and MOExtended tires in general and or the following tire sizes e 225 45 R17 e 245 40 R17 e 225 40 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load e 245 35 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load Operation Maintenance In the Operation section you will find de tailed information on operating maintain ing and caring for your vehicle We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indi cator display Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times mileage will result in ve hicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The maintenance service indicator will no tify you when your next maintenance ser vice is due Starting approximately one month before maintenance service is due one of the fol lowing messages will appear in the multi function display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition example service A Service A in XXXXX miles km Service A in XXX days Service A in X day Carry out
268. icator lamp 366 Standard display menu Control system 128 Standing lamps 110 401 Standing water driving instructions 300 Starter switch positions 36 Starting 36 50 Difficulties with 52 Position in starter switch 36 Steering column see Steering wheel Steering wheel Adjusting 42 Heating 288 Steering wheel gearshift control SLK 280 165 SLK 350 165 SLK 55 AMG 167 Stolen vehicle Recovery services Tele Aid 280 Storage compartments 266 Storing tires 319 Summer opening Power windows 249 Retractable hardtop 257 Sun visors 176 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Symbols in display 374 T Tachometer 121 Taillamps 401 Tar stains see Vehicle care TDMA or CDMA network phones Telephone 236 Technical data Air conditioning refrigerant 451 Brake fluid 451 Coolants 453 Electrical system 446 Engine 438 Engine oil 451 Fuel additives 453 Fuel requirements 452 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 449 Headlamp cleaning system 456 Main dimensions 447 Parts service 434 Premium unleaded gasoline 452 Rims andtires 439 Weights 448 Windshield washer system 456 Tele Aid system 273 462 Call priority 279 Initiating an emergency call 276 Remote door unlock 280 Requirements 273 Roadside Assistance 277 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 280 System self check 274 Telephone 272 Compartment 266 GSM network phones 229 Operation 151 203 Tightening torque 462 Wheel bolts 419 Time and date synchronization with head unit Co
269. icle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selector lever from position P manual transmission into Neutral either of which could result in an accident and or serious injury Switching off headlamps gt Turn exterior lamp switch to WJ gt page 55 For more information see Lighting gt page 110 Turning off engine gt gt Manual transmission Move the gear shift lever into first or reverse gear Automatic transmission Place the gear selector lever in position P Always set the parking brake in addi tion to shifting into first or reverse gear automatic transmission gear selec tor lever in position P On slopes turn the front wheels to wards the road curb Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated Vehicles with automatic transmission The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Press the seat belt release button gt page 49 Guide the latch plate to allow the re tractor to completely rewind the seat belt Getting started Parking and locking Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanis
270. ield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate S to a pre mixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point gt page 456 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change When scraping ice or snow from the rear window be careful not to damage the sealing strip or apertures along the side of the window Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Can ada RAC and have been designed specif ically for use in snow conditions Using winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter operation For safe handling make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design Warning IN Winter tires with a tread depth under he in 4 mm must be replaced They are no long er suitable for winter operation Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires mounted to your vehicl
271. ield wipers e High beam headlamps Power window switches Door handle Cruise control lever Page 42 43 288 173 307 595 110 99 56 55 246 97 260 At a glance Cockpit a Instrument cluster S40 3 miles PRENESI HET P54 32 3437 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item Page Item Page Multifunction display ag Seat belt telltale 71 WE Left turn signal 55 with 366 indicator lamp Main odometer 128 EEDI High beam 55 W Right turn signal Trip odometer 122 headlamp indicator 114 indicator lamp lam T Automatic transmission ai j Electronic Stability 84 Gear range indicator 158 Fuel gauge with Program ESP 365 Automatic transmission 163 BUM fuel reserve warning 365 Maney grap Program mode 169 lamp Brake warning lamp 59 Outside temperature 138 The arrow indicates that the 304 USA only 363 indicator or actual speed fuel filler flap is on the rear Brake warning lamp 363 when selected right hand side Canada only Tachometer with Clock 122 Reset button 120 RRR Engine malfunction 364 Speedometer with Knobs for instrument 120 indicator lamp FESS Supplemental 64 cluster illumination USA only Restraint System 366 a Engine malfunction 364 es UIMeMGS ol n indicator lamp SB Antilock Brake 82 Canada only System ABS 362 indicator lamp At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Item Page Multifunction display 120 Moving with
272. ield wipers operate with washer fluid To prevent smears on the windshield wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 315 Getting started Driving If anything blocks the windshield wip ers leaves snow etc switch them off immediately e For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe location turn off the en gine and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch before at tempting to remove any blockage e Remove blockage e Turn the windshield wipers on again If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with combination switch in position I e set combination switch to the next higher wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be op erating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The coolant temperature is above 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine Allow engine and
273. ight alloy Wheel offset Collapsible tire Must not be used with snow chains Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yel low label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator s Manual inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pres sure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim Technical data Rims and tires All models 4 5Bx 17 H2 0 47 in 12 mm 145 70 17 92P Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires Inflate the collapsible tire to approxi mately 51 psi 3 5 bar The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package does not have a spare wheel The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package is equipped with TIREFIT gt page 408 Technical data Electrical system Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque SLK 280 14 V 150 A 12 V 1 4 kW 12 V 62 Ah NGK PLKR 6A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 15 22 lb ft 20 30 Nm SLK 350 14 V 150 A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 74 Ah Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33 NGK PLKR 6A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 15 22 b ft 20 30 Nm SLK 55 AMG 14 V 150 A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 74 Ah NGK IFR6D10 0 039 in 1 0 mm 18 22 lb ft 25
274. ij to EA Ifa station cannot be tuned in a search is automatically started Controls in detail Audio system Introduction to satellite radio USA only SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan nels of digital quality radio among others music sports news and entertainment free of commercials SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day coast to coast in the contiguous U S This diverse satellite delivered program ming is available for a monthly subscrip tion fee For more information and service availability call the SIRIUS Service Center gt page 218 or contact www siriusradio com Additional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider Programming content is subject to change Therefore channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider Satellite radio service may be unavail able or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons such as envi ronmental or topographic conditions and ot
275. ill not however turn off any head thorax air bag It should be noted however that there is a possibility of a head thorax air bag related injury if occupants especially children are not properly seated or restrained when next to a head thorax air bag which needs to de ploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the head thorax air bag be activated 2 Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under Safety and Security Occupant safety 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your passenger seat occupants to have the pas senger head thorax air bag deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center at an addi tional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety a We caution you not to rely on the pres Safety guid
276. iller flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 328 Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustra tions below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels Placard Example A __ SEATING CAPACITY The combined weight of occupants and cag should never exceed KKN kg or XXX lbs SEE OWNER S FRONT P196 70R14 200KPA 29 81 MANUAL FOR BE DITIONAL stip P40 00 2064 31 P195 70R14 200KPA 29PS a E a D N M n M E a a JG7DA0JE4155036 E i Es 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example A lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Operation Tires and wheels Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION VEHI4 LE CAPACITY WEIGHT a E SEATHIG CAPACITY Ey OOO O 1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example B lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the
277. imate control Activating gt Press button emg gt page 192 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions e cooling on to dehumidify e maximum blowing and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows Deactivating gt Press button mg gt page 192 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The previous settings are once again in effect The cooling remains switched on Windows fogged on the outside Keep this setting selected only until the _ windshield is clear again gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 56 gt Press button Ag gt page 192 The indicator lamp on the button come on Air distribution and air volume are adjusted automatically If the automatic air distribution and air vol ume are switched off gt Turn air distribution control 8 to position or BRM gt page 192 Maximum cooling MAX COOL When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode Mg and there is a high need for cooling MAX COOL is activated This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle s in terior when retractable hardtop Is closed MAX COOL will appear in display gt page 192 Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving
278. in a menu Operating control system 123 Press button Selecting a submenu or set aY for next display ting the volume IRI for previous display Press button Menu systems up to increase Press button BER down to decrease for next menu Telephone for previous menu Press button to take a call or to dial a call to end a call or to reject an incoming call a SLK 55 AMG The steering wheel in this vehicle will vary from steering wheel shown How ever multifunction steering wheel sym bols and feature description apply to AMG vehicles as well At a glance Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Center console Upper part One OOo OHU O Item Cup holder Audio system or COMAND see separate operating instructions AIRSCARF neck level heating switch passenger side Seat heater switch passenger side Central unlocking switch Hazard warning flasher switch Central locking switch ESP switch Seat heater switch driver s side Page 268 129 105 104 101 117 101 84 104 Item AIRSCARF neck level heating switch driver s side Q Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 2 Climate control Automatic climate control Rear window defroster switch 3 Cigarette lighter Ashtray Page 105 T 367 178 190 177 270 269 Lower part Automatic transmission ao Item Gear selector lever M
279. in detail Control system Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc tion display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or re moved from the starter switch gt Press button repeatedly until you have seen all occurred messages The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display gt page 368 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu In the Settings menu are two func tions The function To reset Press reset button for 3 seconds for resetting all settings to factory standard A collection of submenus for perform ing individual settings for your vehicle Press button or repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display Settings To reset Press reset button for 3 seconds P34 32 2800 31 The following settings and submenus are available in the Settings menu Function Resetting all settings Submenus in the Settings menu Instrument cluster submenu Time date submenu Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu Page 134 135 137 137 143 147 147 Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all sub menus to the factory settings gt Press the reset butt
280. indow Is clear The indicator lamp on the rear window The defroster is automatically deactivated defroster switch maj comes on after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of op eration depending on the outside tempera B T ture The rear window defroster cannot be switched on when the retractable hard Warning A N top is open The indicator lamp starts flashing if the hardtop is open Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired The rear window defroster can be endangering you and others switched on again e Close the retractable hardtop first Controls in detail Good visibility Switching off gt Press the rear window defroster switch ER again in the control panel of the climate control or the automatic climate control The indicator lamp on the rear window defroster switch falj goes out If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing this means that too many electrical consumers are operat ing simultaneously and there is insuffi cient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster au tomatically turns itself back on Controls in detail Climate control mas iamm mr 7 i i al i 42 fo an ian E 13 f j i i
281. ine gt page 61 N Neutral position D Drive position For more information see Automatic transmission gt page 157 Getting started Driving Starting gt Place the gear selector lever in position P Do not depress accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 36 and release it again immediately The engine starts automatically For information on turning off the engine see Turning off engine gt page 61 Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and repeat the starting procedure Remember that extended starting at tempts can drain the vehicle battery Get a jump start gt page 424 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Parking brake A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning 1 Parking brake lever 2 Release button gt Pull up slightly on parking brake lev
282. inflation pressure and do not ex ed by the label on the pillar in the driver s door opening Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Vehicle handling characteristics may ceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h change Adapt your driving accordingly gt Replace your TIREFIT container every 4 years Replacement containers are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel with collapsible tire replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel with collapsible tire is mounted Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described gt page 408 gt Takethecollapsible tire wheel wrench wheel bolts jack and electric air pump out of the trunk gt page 388 Practical hints Flat tire Lifting the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks not included or other sizeable ob jects One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit gt page 388 When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizeable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However shoul
283. ing knob Doors 97 460 Locking the vehicle 62 Long trip checking before 305 Loss of Service and Warranty Booklet 435 SmartKey or mechanical key 97 Low beam headlamps 110 401 Lubricants technical data 449 M Settings 134 Main dimensions 447 Settings submenus 135 Maintenance service indicator Control Standard display 128 system 350 TEL 151 Maintenance System U S vehicles 460 Time Date submenu Service indicator calling up 351 Trip computer 149 Manual seat see Seats Vehicle status message memory Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG 169 Vehicle submenu 147 Manual transmission 155 Messages in display 368 Driving 53 Cruise control 370 Gearshift pattern 51 ESP 371 Starting with SmartKey 51 Maintenance service indicator Maximum inflation pressure 345 SRS 372 Maximum load rating 345 Symbols 374 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 345 Transmission 372 Mechanical key see SmartKey Memory function 107 460 Menus Mirrors 173 AUDIO 129 Additional turn signals Convenience submenu 147 Adjusting 45 Instrument cluster submenu 137 Antiglare position 173 Lighting submenu 143 Auto dimming 174 NAV 132 Exterior rear view mirrors Overview Control system 126 127 Interior rear view mirror 136 Parking position 108 148 175 Vehicle status message memory Mirror lamp see Sun visors MOExtended system 333 MON 304 460 Motor Octane Number see MON MP3 220 Multifunction display 123 460 Engine oil messages 309 Messages 132 Messages with symb
284. ing sound gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt Adjust sound during a telephone call Sound adjustment gt page 207 Placing a call gt After correct telephone number has Entering a telephone number and been entered press button starting the dialing process Q If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the phone book the name will appear in the display Phone book PEZ 60 45586 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using The numbers stored in the phone book of buttons E to Gg the mobile telephone can be called up a either by name or number The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in In addition incoming calls are stored in the the display phone book This is only possible however when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book Searching and calling up phone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone s phone book with the audio system You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book LLR HOM RECU PEZ 60 4559 31 or or Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press desired numerical key to EA The stored entries ar
285. iode in the magazine slot button lights up in red The magazine slot is loaded The light emitting diode in the next available magazine slot button flashes in green The CD changer is ready to re ceive the next CD gt Repeat the previous step until all six magazine slots are loaded Once all magazine slots are loaded the CD in the sixth magazine slot is played If for example you only want to load magazine slots 1 4 instead of all six simply do not insert a fifth CD into the CD loading slot The CD changer will first try to load a CD but will then can cel the procedure after which the radio will play the fourth CD gt Close the glove box Ejecting CDs I The CD playback is interrupted while one or more CDs are being ejected Ejecting single CDs gt Open the glove box gt Briefly press desired magazine slot but ton The light emitting diode in the maga zine slot button flashes in red The cor responding CD is ejected EJECTING CD appears in the display along with the magazine slot number Remove CD from CD loading slot within 15 seconds If after removing a single CD no other CDs remain loaded in the magazine MAG EMPTY appears in the display I If you do not take the CD from the CD loading slot within 15 seconds the CD changer will automatically pull the CD back in The system will then play the CD If you are listening to a CD while eject ing another CD from the c
286. ion your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passenger should al ways wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed Getting started Driving In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 64 Getting started Driving Warning A N Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will result Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmart compatible in fant or child restraint system which is prop erly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions A child s risk of serious or fatal injurie
287. ions of this Operators Manual Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Title illustration no P00 0 1 2930 31 Press time April 8 2005 GSP TIP Printed in Germany
288. is lowered a warning will sound In the multifunction dis play you will see and the message Retractable roof being opened e Properly lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive gt page 256 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Warning A N The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or not fully opened and locked if e the message Retractable roof in operation is shown in the multifunc tion display e a warning sounds for 10 seconds when driving and a message in the multifunc tion display appears gt page 381 If the retractable hardtop is not properly locked lock it as described below Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Unlocked status noticed when stopped Unlocked status noticed while driving gt gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 To lock the retractable hardtop in its Warning A fully closed position push the retract able hardtop switch forward until the retractable hardtop is fully closed Stop the vehicle and lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth Or ers To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position push the retract gt Stop the vehicle and leave the ignition able hardtop switch rearward until the switched on retractable hardtop is fully open To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position push the retract able hardtop switch forward unti
289. ission to Neutral Switch off all electrical consumers Remove SmartKey from starter switch Open the hood gt page 307 Turn locks 2 one quarter turn Remove water tray Q Read and observe safety instructions and precautions gt page 421 Use a 10 mm open end wrench to dis connect the negative lead from battery negative terminal G gt page 421 Remove the cover from the positive terminal Use a 10 mm open end wrench to dis connect the positive lead from battery positive terminal 2 gt page 421 Removing the battery gt gt gt vy Remove the screw on the swivel bar Remove the swivel bar Pull out the battery ventilation tube from the battery depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery Take out the battery Charging and reinstalling battery Warning A N Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz is being used Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the bat tery in its installed position Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for infor mation and availability Ch
290. istribution con trol setting Controls in detail Automatic climate control Cle MeO Meo OO 290 Item Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left side air vent Left side air vent adjustable Fixed air vent for defrosting left side window Left center air vent fixed Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed adjustable left center air vents Left center air vent adjustable Cockpit air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for cockpit air vent Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed adjustable right center air vents Right center air vent fixed Fixed air vent for defrosting right side window Controls in detail Automatic climate control Item Right side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable right side air vent 5 Automatic climate control panel When you turn the thumbwheels and io upwards to the first stop the fixed center air vents 4 and 1 and the adjustable center air vents and 9 are open When you turn the thumbwheels com pletely upwards only the adjustable center air vents 6 and 9 are open For draft free ventilation move the slid ers for the center air vents and to the middle position Controls in detail Automatic climate control KORo Item a 8 Air volume control manual as vale Ee Automatic mode KEA Front defroster
291. ition Otherwise the hardtop Only use acid free cleaning materials di may move unexpectedly which may result in Acid may cause corrosion or damage Fold the windshield wiper arms back personal injury to you or others the clear coat onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch gt Usea clean cloth and window cleaning Hold on to the wiper when folding the solution on all outside and inside glass wiper arm back If released the force surfaces of the impact from the tensioning An automotive glass cleaner is recom spring could crack the windshield mended The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corro sion of the brake discs and brake pads Therefore the vehicle s brake system should always be warmed up before it is parked after cleaning To do so please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry When applying Mercedes Benz ap proved Tire Care and Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care products take care not to spray them on the brake discs Plastic and rubber parts gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Do not use oil or wax on these parts Instrument cluster and cup holders gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mi
292. ition N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skid ding e g on icy roads a Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control After brief acceleration e g for passing the cruise control will resume the last speed set Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed gt Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 gt page 261 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set Setting a lower speed gt Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 gt page 261 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Controls in detail Driving systems Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow Q gt page 261 Slower gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 gt page 261 Setting to last stored speed Resume function Warning A N The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences a
293. ive wrap e Collapsible chock e Vehicle jack e Protective wrap O Spare wheel l 4 Alignment bolt 2 Vehicle tool kit under collapsible tire Towing eye bolt e Alignment bolt together with wheel bolts for spare 6 Wheel wrench e Towing eye bolt wheel with collapsible tire 7 Spare fuses fuse extractor and valve s hearen 3 Retaining screw extractor gt Open the trunk gt page 98 Electric air pump Spare fuses gt Lift up trunk floor Fuse extractor gt Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it Val xtr r i alve extracto counter clockwise Electric air pump TIREFIT kit Remove spare wheel Q 388 gt Remove vehicle tool kit Practical hints Where will I find Vehicles with TIREFIT Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from O TIREFIT kit the area under the lifted vehicle Always 7 aes Vehicle jack firmly set parking brake and block wheels Storage position 3 Collapsible wheel chock before raising vehicle with jack gt Remove vehicle jack from its Towing eye bolt m Do not disengage parking brake whi
294. ized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Continue driving with added caution Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Close all doors Display symbol Display message Check oil level when next refueling USA only Add 1 qt engine oil when next refueling Canada only Possible cause consequence SLK 280 and SLK 350 only gt The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level gt SLK 55 AMG only gt The engine oil level is too low Add 1 liter engine oil when next refueling When the message Add 1 qt Canada 1 liter engine oil when next refueling SLK 55 AMG or Check oil level when next refueling SLK 280 SLK 350 appears while the engine is run ning and at operating temperature the en gine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level When this occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil leaks are noted drive to the nearest ser vice station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an ap proved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Check the engine oil level gt page 308 and add engine oil as required gt page 312 If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks Ad
295. izes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equip ment but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory equipped wheel rim tire configuration on your vehicle Sport Package etc equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for more infor mation Same size tires Model Summer tires Rims light alloy Wheel offset Winter tires Rims light alloy Wheel offset Winter tires 2 Rims light alloy Wheel offset l Radial ply tires 2 Not available as factory equipment SLK 280 205 55 R16 91H M S 7Jx16H2 1 34 in 34 mm 3 Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator only Technical data Rims and tires SLK 280 SLK 350 225 45 R17 91H M S 75 NX 17 H2 1 42 in 36 mm 225 45 R17 91H M S MOExtended 7 5 x 17 H2 1 42 in 36 mm Technical data Rims and tires Model Summer tires Rims light alloy Wheel offset Winter tires 2 Rims light alloy Wheel offset Radial ply tires 2 Not available as factory equipment SLK 280 Sport Package SLK 350 Sport Package SLK 55 AMG 205 50 R17 89H M S or 225 45 R17 91H M S 79Jx 17 H2 1 46 in 3
296. l ure causing loss of vehicle control and pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 280 with Sport Package SLK 350 with Sport Package Your vehicle is factory equipped with W rated tires which have a tire speed rating of 168 mph 270 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h SLK 55 AMG Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a tire speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a tire speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 174 mph 280 km h For information on speed rating for winter tires see Winter tires gt page 348 For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall see Tire speed rating gt page 334 Operation Driving instructions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads Is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move ge
297. l remain lit for approximately 5 minutes Controls in detail Lighting Controls in detail instrument cluster A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination cluster can be found in the Ata glance section gt page 24 The instrument cluster illumination Adjusting automatically adjusts to the ambient The multifunction display in the instrument light l The knobs for adjusting the instrument cluster is activated when you J 8 cluster illumination are on the left side of e open a door the instrument cluster gt page 24 You can only adjust the brightness of the instrument cluster illumination when it is dark outside e switch on exterior lighting e switch on ignition gt page 36 With the exterior lighting switched on the brightness of the switches in the center console will be adjusted when using knob or e press reset button gt page 24 Opening a door or pressing the reset button without switching on the ig nition or the exterior lighting activates the multifunction display illumination Brightening illumination only for 30 seconds Brightening illumination knob gt Press knob briefly 2 Dimming illumination knob The instrument cluster illumination For information on changing the instru Reset button brightens ment cluster settings e g the language see Instrument cluster submenu Dimming illumina
298. l the retractable hardtop is fully closed Or To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position push the retract able hardtop switch rearward until the retractable hardtop is fully open Opening and closing the retractable hardtop with the SmartKey The power windows gt page 246 will also be opened or closed when you operate the retractable hardtop with the SmartKey A Before operating the retractable hardtop make sure no persons can be injured by the moving parts retractable roof roof frame and trunk lid due to negligence Warning Hands must never be placed near the roof frame upper windshield area hardtop shelf behind roll bars or trunk lid while the re tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release the re spective button on the SmartKey This im mediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure You can then operate or to raise or lower the hardtop away from the danger zone Wry Aim transmitter eye at the outside driver s or passenger door handle The SmartKey must be in close proxim ity to the respective outside door han dle Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold unlock button un til the retractable hardtop is complete ly open The retractable hardtop and windows begin to open after approximately 1 second In the multifu
299. lamps high beam flasher lamp Bi Xenon headlamps is mal functioning The light sensor is malfunctioning The headlamps switch on automati cally The left license plate lamp is mal functioning The right license plate lamp is mal functioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible vy Replace the bulb as soon as possible vy Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Inthe control system set lamp operation to manual gt page 143 gt Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch gt page 110 gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol O ows 1 Display message Lert Peverse lamp malfunction Right reverse lamp malfunction Low beam left Low beam right Peles I 1G front left Pairk Ir cinit eC Tea Remove key Possible cause consequence Possible solution The left backup lamp is malfunc tioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible The right backup lamp is malfunc tioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible The left low beam lamp is malfunc Halogen headlamp Honing gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The right
300. lay The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the telephone book appears in the display If the caller s number is not relayed CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Controls in detail Audio system Muting a call lt is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Controls in detail Audio system Accepting a second incoming call e Switching between calls If you receive another call during an gt Press button already active call you can accept the second call and switch between the two This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold Accepting a second call e Terminating a call gt Place new call by entering b Pex Haito telephone number manually
301. ld detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke warm solution To prevent scratches do not use scour ing agents Operation Vehicle care Hard plastic trim items gt Use Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure onto To prevent scratches do not use scour ing agents Steering wheel and gearshift gear se lector lever gt Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor oughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Carpets gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the car pets Operation Vehicle care Headliner and shelf below rear window gt Use a soft bristle brush or a dry sham poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts gt Use only clear lukewarm water and soap The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight A Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning Upholstery Wood trims gt Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored
302. le spare tire are obtainable Controls in detail Useful features The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button remains illumi nated in red for approx 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on ignition together with the SOS button and the Information button RRR See System self check gt page 274 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than ap proximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button is flashing con tinuously and there was no voice con nection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call e g the relevant cellu lar phone network was not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance calls can be ter minated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the re spective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND head unit Information button Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button DI gt Open center armrest cover gt page 266 gt Press and hold the button for longer than 2 seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio sys
303. le the ai a Alignment bolt ne ae Wheel wrench vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is gt Turn crank handle in the direction of always vertical plumb line when in use arrow as far as it will go aviractor erie i eae try as as Ics Flectric air pump on level sur age e sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Al gt Open the trunk gt page 98 ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient gt Lift up trunk floor capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle 7 Spare fuses fuse extractor and valve Practical hints Where will I find Setting up the collapsible wheel chock Tilt both plates upward Q The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad Fold the lower plate outward 2 ditionally secure the vehicle e g while changing the wheel Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the base f plate a 1 P40 10 4102 31 Operational position gt Turn crank handle clockwise Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment e t should be fully collapsed e The handle must be folded in storage position P40 10 2776 31 1 Tilt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate Spare wheel with collapsible tire The spare wheel is stored in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor 1 Spare wheel spare wheel bolts located under plastic cover on the outside of
304. le with the charged battery and run at idle speed Connect negative terminal of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal in front of the water tray with the second jumper cable Clamp the cable to negative terminal of the charged battery first Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle You can now turn on the electrical con sumers Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances gt Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and and then from positive terminals 2 and You can now turn on the lights gt Have the battery checked at the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center Vehicles with automatic transmission Do not tow start vehicle Practical hints Towing the vehicle When circumstances do not permit the T recommended towing methods the vehi cle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehi cle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch Vehicles with automatic transmission Do not tow start vehicle Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equip ment with the SmartKey in the starter switch in position O Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy road
305. lease follow Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles recommendations for sched uled oil changes Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air con ditioning system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil otherwise damage to the system will occur Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere A Under extremely strenuous operating condi tions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus re ducing the system s efficiency Warning Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will pro vide you with additional information Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Premium unleaded gasoline A Gasoline is highly fla
306. low beam lamp is malfunc Halogen headlamp PONIES gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The left front parking lamp is mal gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible functioning The right front parking lamp is mal gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible functioning You have forgotten to remove the gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter SmartKey switch Display symbol 10 oe I Display message Side marker lamp front left Side marker lamp TPO AOT Rear left side marker lamp malfunction Rear right side marker lamp malfunction Pal atte ert Back up lamp on Tey Wiccan Back up lamp on Possible cause consequence The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning The left rear side marker lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working The right rear side marker lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working The left tail lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working A backup bulb has been brought into use The right tail lamp is malfunction ing This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working A backup bulb has been brought into use
307. ls that can be operated from the driver s seat a Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi cle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you ES SS Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle C Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle EE Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter a Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section el Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operators Manual e the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment op
308. lways e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Pull up the parking brake lever firmly e Move the gear selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving Getting started Parking and locking Parking brake 1 Parking brake lever 2 Release button gt Pull up parking brake lever firmly When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running the brake warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the speedometer dial comes on Getting started Parking and locking Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in position P manual transmission first or reverse gear is dangerous Also when parked on an in cline position P manual transmission first or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the veh
309. ly halted by releasing button Ey Deactivating gt Press button gt page 192 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside tem perature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air condition ing is turned off gt page 200 e after 30 minutes if the outside tem perature is above approximately 41 F 5 C If you press button and keep it pressed the side windows will open The opening of the windows can be im mediately halted by releasing button Ey Air conditioning The cooling function only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle interior down to the selected tempera ture The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior thus preventing the windows from fogging up The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer Warning A N If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Condensation may drip from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate cont
310. m This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim panel Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on gt page 110 The message Turn off lights appears in the multifunction display Getting started Parking and locking o Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the win dows are covered with ice As a result you may no longer be able to properly close the door Do not attempt to force the door shut Doing so may damage the door or the side window Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door Locking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always
311. marker with Setting the date day button or E to the Time Date This function can be seen in vehicles with This function can be seen in vehicles with submenu audio system or in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND and navigation module if the Press button Bj or Reg repeatedly COMAND and navigation module if the time and date synchronization with head until you see Set date month in the time and date synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off gt page 139 multifunction display unit feature was set to Off gt page 139 ri The selection marker is on the month E Vehicles with COMAND a E D Sal dale Vehicles with COMAND Ea For information on setting the time in month For information on setting the time in COMAND refer to the separate 5 COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions Ea 28 2005 COMAND operating instructions 1 P54 32 3515 31 gt Press button or E to set the month Controls in detail Control system gt Move the selection marker with Setting the date year gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date Tals E EEEE be secnnachicies wih button or E to the Time Date submenu submenu audio system or in vehicles with gt Press button Mj or Keg repeatedly COMAND and navigation module ifthe Press button BANG or Reg repeatedly until you see Set date day inthe mul time and date synchronization with head until you see S
312. may switch off unexpect edly when the system senses bright am bient light for example light from oncoming traffic e the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others acti vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position WA to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from g to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Controls in detail Lighting The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Bag With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically When the engine is running the low beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position WEJ or Big When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on In low ambient light conditions the fol lowing lamps will switch on additional ly e Tail and parki
313. ment of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms hands fin gers etc the automatic reversal will not op erate Controls in detail Power windows Fully opening the door windows Express open gt Press switch 4 or at the symbol V past the resistance point and release The corresponding window opens completely Fully closing the door windows Express close gt Press switch or 2 at the symbol J past the resistance point and release The corresponding window closes completely Warning A N Driver s door only If the switch is pressed again past the resis tance point and released within 5 seconds the automatic reversal will not operate gt D Controls in detail Power windows D gt p If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing proce dure the window will stop and open slightly Remove the obstruction press the re spective switch at the symbol EAN again past the resistance point and re lease If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction press and hold the respective switch at the symbol J The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function Stopping windows during Express operation gt Briefly press the respective switch at the symbol kg or EAN again Opening and closing the windows with the retractable hardtop switch All windows can be opened or closed with
314. mmable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious inju ry Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Warning To maintain the engine s durability and performance premium unleaded gaso line must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two per sons and no luggage Do not exceed Ta of maximum ac celerator pedal position if the vehi cle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuel requirements Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE not to exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
315. mphlet are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which pro vides e Corrosion protection e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corro sion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the cool ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil over protec tion Refer to Maintenance Booklet for in formation on replacement intervals Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solu tion or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to
316. n CD and the selected magazine slot number appear in the upper left hand corner of the display If you have not removed a CD since the last time the CD audio source was activated the last CD listened to will begin to play at the point where it was switched off After the last track on a CD has finished the next CD is automatically played Playing tracks You have the following options e Audio system with CD changer selecting CDs e Direct track entry e Track skip forward reverse e Fast forward reverse e Scan e Random tracks e Repeat track Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer Cod RDM RPT P82 60 4455 31 gt You can select from among the inserted CDs with buttons EE to A WE CD player in the audio unit Gl to BRAM CDs inthe CD changer The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot NO CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number Direct track entry P82 60 4456 31 You can make a direct selection from among the tracks on a CD gt Press button gt Enter track number using buttons EEE to EEN The number of the track being played appears next to TRACK in the display You can only enter available track numbers Controls in detail Audio system Skipping tracks forward backward Ski
317. n ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s dura bility or safety Y Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will ex change or repair any defective parts origi nally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties e New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a re placement It will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels c Z p01 00 2582 31 1 Certification label includes paintwork Vehicle Identification Number VIN 3 E
318. n refer to the garage door opener operator s manual gt D l l l Step 7 gt Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button or and observe the indicator lamp gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Controls in detail Useful features gt gt Step 9 50 Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to press hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmit ter button a third time to complete the training process gt Press the training button on the ga rage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow ing step Step 10 les l Step 12 gt Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the pro grammed signal transmitter button 2 or Step 11 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans mitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 gt Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a sec ond time to complete the training pro cess Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmi
319. n unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gearshift lever which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and re duced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Controls in detail Manual transmission Gearshift pattern for manual transmission When you are shifting into the 5th or 6th gear make sure that you press the gearshift lever to the right Other wise you could accidentally shift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission Downshifting gears leading to overrev ving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not exceed the engine speed limits Refer to tachometer gt page 121 for engine speeds Shifting into reverse Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary as the transmis sion could otherwise be damaged Stop the vehicle completely Fully depress the clutch pedal gt Move the gearshift lever to the neutral position no gear selected gt Move the gearshift lever to the left until you feel a certain resist
320. nals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left Getting started Driving gt Press combination switch in direction of arrow C or 2 The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp EJ or Kell in the instrument cluster flashes gt page 24 The combination switch resets auto matically after major directional chang es To signal minor directional changes press combination switch only to point of resistance and release The corre sponding turn signals will flash three times Windshield wipers T Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to op erate the wipers in dry weather condi tions always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid gt page 57 The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Switching on windshield wipers Combination switch gt Turn the combination switch to the de Single wipe sired position depending on the inten Wiping with windshield washer fluid sity of the rain 2 Switching on windshield wipers O Windshield wipers off gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed II Fast wiper speed Int
321. nction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation Release button on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Closing Convenience closing feature gt Press and hold lock button until the retractable hardtop is fully closed The retractable hardtop and windows begin to close after approximately 1 second In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation Release button on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure Warning A N When closing the side windows and retract able hardtop make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure If potential danger exists proceed as fol lows e Release button to stop the closing procedure To open press and hold button E To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure press and hold button eg Warning A N If the retractable hardtop does not com pletely open or close the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered e after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on e after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the hardtop is lowered a warning will sound In the multifunction dis play you will see and the message Retractable roof being opened e Properly lock the retra
322. nd are based on conditions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored in the system A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or drivers responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages gt page 368 Warning gt Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message mem ory appears in the multifunction dis play If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear then there are no messages stored Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the multifunction dis play 4 2 messages SF P54 32 3343 31 1 Number of messages gt Press button EN or Re The stored messages will now be dis played in the order in which they have occurred For malfunction and warning messages see Vehicle status messag es in the multifunction display gt page 368 Controls
323. ndshield Do not pull the release lever while the vehi cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow Opening The hood release is located on the driver side under the instrument panel 2 Lever for opening the hood gt Push lever 2 on the hood upward to 1 Hood lock release lever ediaace Head Operation Engine compartment gt With the hood released lift the hood by lifting it at the front edge The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas filled struts A To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers Warning The radiator fan may continue to run for ap proximately 30 seconds or even restart af ter the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades gt D Operation Engine compartment Warning A N If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature display in the multifunction display indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down If necessary call the fire department Warning A N The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dang
324. ng its tilted position insert cover 1 by applying the latches at the top left and lower right corner into the opening To close cover 1 press on the diago nal opposite side of the marked corner until it fully engages Make sure the covers check strap does not get caught when closing Rear cover 1 Cover in rear bumper PA8 20 2452 31 Removing Press mark on cover Q Cover Q springs open at the top Pull at the protruding part of cover and fold cover down to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eye bolt Do not disconnect cover Q from its check strap Screw towing eye bolt in to its end stop and tighten with lug wrench Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing gt Unscrew the towing eye bolt using the lug wrench To reinstall cover tilt the marked lower edge towards the opening Maintaining its tilted position insert cover 1 by applying the latches at the marked lower edge into the opening To close cover Q press on the un marked top until it fully engages a Make sure the cover s check strap does not get caught when closing Practical hints Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electri T Aids for replacing fuses cal circuits in your vehicle from a short cir cuit If a fuse is blown the component s and systems secured by that fuse will stop working Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Have the cause determined Fuse
325. ng lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam head lamps ab With the daytime running lamp mode and the exterior lamp switch in position E you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times Canada only The daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode Vehicles with automatic transmission When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three minute delay When the engine Is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position gj the parking lamps switch on additionally e turn the exterior lamp switch to position the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime run ning lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 110 USA only By default the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated Activate the daytime run ning lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode gt page 143 When the engine is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position gj or J the manual head lamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 110 Locator lighting and night security illu Fog lamps
326. ngine number engraved on engine code located behind the passenger seat 4 VIN visible lower edge of windshield under the floor cover Vacuum line routing diagram label 6 Emission control information label includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine num bers Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive Y Layout of poly V belt drive SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG D Q AC P13 22 2096 31 6 5 4 P13 22 2040 31 1 Idler pulley 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Idler pulley 2 Power steering pump 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Power steering pump 4 Crankshaft Air conditioning compressor Coolant pump 6 Crankshaft 6 Generator alternator 7 Coolant pump 7 Idler pulley Generator alternator Technical data Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output according to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque according to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt SLK 280 171 454 272 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 6 3 47 in 88 00 mm 3 24 in 82 20 mm 182 8 cu in 2996 cm 11 351 228 hp 6000 rpm 170 kW 6000 rpm 221 b ft 2700 5000 rpm 300 Nm 2700 5000 rpm 6500 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 2404 mm SL
327. nk lid to fully open If the vehicle has previously been cen trally locked with the SmartKey open ing the trunk from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the fol lowing e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact ex ceeds a preset threshold To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic cen tral locking when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e is ona test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system see Setting automatic locking gt page 147 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un locked with the central locking or unlock ing switch respectively Warning A N
328. not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Gasoline additives I A major concern among engine manufac turers is carbon build up caused by gaso line Mercedes Benz only recommends the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon depos its After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet for a listing of approved product s Follow directions on product label Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to engine operation Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending addition al fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pa
329. not leave retractable hardtop to move up and For safety reasons the retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still Warning A N Before operating the switch for the retract able hardtop make sure no persons are in jured by the moving parts retractable hardtop roof frame and trunk lid Hands must never be placed near the roof frame upper windshield area retractable hardtop shelf behind roll bars or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release the re tractable hardtop switch This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure You can then operate the retractable hard top switch to raise or lower the retractable hardtop away from the danger zone children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear shelf Doing so could cause dam age to the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf the trunk lid to move back e the cargo compartment cover is extended and closed e the trunk is only loaded to the height of the cargo compartment cover e the luggage cargo does not push the closed cargo compartment cover up e the trunk lid is closed e no roof luggage carrier is installed e the outside temperature is above
330. ns are stored on the station buttons JJ to QM in order of signal strength e Calling up stations gt Press desired station button EE to a e Leaving the Autostore memory level gt Press FM or AM soft key briefly Interrupting radio mode The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone gt page 235 e Mute on gt Press EE button The radio mode is interrupted and MUTED appears in the display e Mute off gt Press E button The radio mode Is again active Controls in detail Audio system Weather band Search Scan search gt Press MRE or E89 button to tunein Starting scan search the next receivable weather band gt Press SC soft key station 7 SC will appear in the display The i radio briefly approximately If no weather band station is received 8 seconds tunes in all receivable Pa2 60 4458 31 after three consecutive scans of the weather band stations complete frequency range then the gt Press WB soft key scan stops at the channel with which it e Ending scan search The weather band station last received began and NO WB FOUND appears in the gt Press SC soft key or EEJ or G tS puneam display The weather band station last If this happens switch back to played will be selected and SC Selecting a weather band station 7 AG BM i standard radio mode disappears from the display directly gt Select desired weather band station with buttons
331. nt side windows Deactivating gt Press button Ke gt page 179 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The previous settings are once again in effect The cooling remains switched on Windshield fogged on the outside gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 56 gt Turn air distribution control G to position or BZ gt page 179 Controls in detail Climate control Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the interior Warning A N Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 187 is activated or press button Keg Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating gt Press button gt page 179 again Activating gt Briefly press button Warning A N gt page 179 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures The indicator lamp on button S not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity o
332. ntrol system 139 TIN 346 Tire and Loading Information 321 Tire and loading terminology 344 Tire care and maintenance 318 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure 410 Air pressure 344 Checking 327 329 Tire inflation pressure see the placard on the fuel filler flap Tire inspection 318 Tire load rating 346 Tire ply composition and material used 346 Tire speed rating 336 346 Tire terminology 344 TIREFIT kit Vehicle tool kit 388 389 TIREFIT Instructions for use 408 Tires 317 439 Cleaning 319 Collapsible Spare wheel 458 Direction of rotation 320 Driving instructions 297 Flat tire 408 Important guidelines 317 Inflating with airpump 417 MOExtended system 333 Mounting wheel 415 Removing wheel 415 Retreads 317 Rims and tires 439 Rotating 347 Run Flat Indicator 329 Service life 318 Sizes 439 Snow chains 349 Spare wheel 391 Speed rating 298 Storing 319 Supplemental tire inflation pressure information 304 Temperature 343 Traction 298 Tread depth 319 348 Treadwear indicators TWI 297 Wear pattern 347 Wheel chock Vehicle tool kit 388 Winter 348 Tools see Vehicle tool kit Tow away alarm see Anti theft systems Towing Vehicle 426 Traction 163 346 Transmission display message 372 Transporting the vehicle 89 Traveling abroad 301 Tread 346 Tread depth 319 348 Treadwear indicators 297 346 Trip computer menu Control system 149 Trunk 98 Cargo compartment cover 253 Lighting
333. o system Obtaining additional text information Additional text information artist title related to the current channel can be displayed gt Press INF soft key The title being played is displayed gt Press INF soft key again The name of the artist performing the title being played is displayed If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds the radio will return to the standard display Storing stations gt gt Tune in desired station Press and hold desired station button E to QM until a brief signal tone is heard The frequency is stored on the selected station button The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected The memory preset selected appears in the status line e g S3 There are ten presets available An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry is given Calling up the ESN information menu gt gt Press INF soft key Press ESN soft key The twelve digit electronic serial number ESN of the SAT tuner installed in your vehicle is displayed Press RET soft key to exit the menu CD mode Safety precautions Warning A N The single CD player and the CD changer are Class 1 laser products There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the housing is opened or damaged Do not open the housing The single CD player and the CD changer do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user For safety re
334. of pressure has been detect gt Check the fuel cap gt page 304 the message Check ed in the fuel system The fuel cap If it is not closed properly gas cap may not be closed properly or the See Operator s fuel system may be leaking gt Close the fuel cap Manual in the multi If it is closed properly function display i gt Have the fuel system checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Problem The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving The yellow ESP warning lamp flash es while driving fm The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp comes on while driving Additionally you see the message Reserve fuel in the multifunction display Possible cause consequence The ESP is deactivated Risk of accident Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road weather and traffic conditions The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of de tected traction loss in at least one tire The fuel level has gone below the re serve mark Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Switch the ESP back on gt page 86 If the ESP cannot be switched back on have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt When driving off apply as little throttle as possible gt While driving ease up on the accelerator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions gt Do not
335. off the ESP e the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle e the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for a better grip e the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel e the ESP continues to operate when you are braking When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer dial flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle The switch is located on the upper part of the center console A When the ESP warning lamp is illumi nated continuously the ESP is switched off Warning Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 1 ESP switch off on gt With the engine running press ESP switch Q The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial comes on The ESP is switched off Switching on the ESP gt Press ESP switch The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial goes out You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on Y Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating
336. ols 374 Messages with text 368 Operation see Control system Multifunction steering wheel 26 124 460 Heating 288 N NAV menu 132 Navigation system see NAV Neck level heating see AIRSCARF Seats Night security illumination Control system 145 Normal occupant weight 345 O Occupant distribution 345 Occupant safety 64 Children 66 75 Infant and child restraint systems 72 75 Seat belts 47 68 71 Oil see Engine oil One touch gearshifting 164 Operating safety 16 203 Operating vehicle outside the USA and Canada 13 Operators Manual 10 Ornamental moldings see Vehicle care Outside temperature indicator 121 129 Outside temperature speed 138 Overhead control panel 30 Overspeed range 121 460 P Paintwork see Vehicle care Panic alarm 80 Parcel net Storage compartment Parking 296 And locking 59 Parking aid see Parking position Parking brake 52 59 Parking lamps 110 401 Parking position 108 Activation Control system Exterior rear view mirrors Parts service 434 Passenger air bag see Air bags Passenger compartment 301 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 367 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Phone book see Telephone Plastic parts cleaning 359 Poly V belt drive 437 460 Potential problems associated with under inflated and overinflated tires 332 Power outlet 271 Power seat see Seats Power train 461 267 148 175 Power washer see Vehicle care Power windows 246 Operating rear side
337. olt install last o Frap wheel bolt and tighten slightly De Pump witch Warning A N 3 Electrical plug gt Inflate the collapsible tire A O Air hose with pressure gauge and vent gt page 417 Observe instructions on air pump label screw Union nut H Do not lower the vehicle before inflat ing the collapsible tire Otherwise the rim may be damaged Practical hints Flat tire gt Take the electric air pump out of the gt Turnthe SmartKey inthe starter switch gt Turn the SmartKey inthe starter switch trunk gt page 388 Open flap G on air pump Pull out electrical plug and air hose with pressure gauge Close vent screw on air hose 4 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve Screw air hose 4 with union nut onto the collapsible tire valve Make sure electric air pump switch 2 is set to 0 Insert electrical plug into the power outlet in the passenger footwell gt page 271 The cigarette lighter gt page 270 is not designed for use with the electric air pump Use the power outlet in the passenger footwell gt page 27 1 for electric air pump operation to position 1 Press I on electric air pump switch 2 The electric air pump switches on and inflates the collapsible tire Inflate the collapsible tire to approxi mately 51 psi 3 5 bar This takes about 5 minutes for the col lapsible tire Air hose and union nut G can become hot during in
338. on gt Press button A gt page 192 D Teni ON In automatic mode cooling with dehu e indicator lamp on the button midifyv i i i i o y is switched on This function can When the climate control system is comes on Air volume and air distribu ae be switched off if necessary switched off the outside air supply and tion are adjusted automatically y circulation are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up Activating gt Press button H gt page 192 while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically gt Use temperature controls and or Q and gt page 192 to sepa rately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compart ment The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically Deactivating gt Press button Big gt page 192 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air volume changes to level 2 and the air distribution changes to IRM Automatic control of air vol ume and air distribution is switched off Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 4 and 2 for the left side or and G for the right side gt page 192 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments prefera
339. on gt page 346 Tread gt page 346 Treadwear indicators gt page 346 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards gt page 346 Vehicle capacity weight gt page 346 Vehicle maximum load on the tire gt page 346 VIN Vehicle Identification Number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced Wind screen Screen for deflecting wind from the ve hicle interior when the hardtop is low ered Technical terms A ABS 82 457 Display message 370 Indicator lamp 362 Accessory weight 344 Accident 58 Adjusting Getting started 38 Air bags 65 BabySmart Children 66 Front 70 Head thorax 71 459 Kneebag 70 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 78 Safety guidelines 68 Air conditioning Automatic climate control 200 Climate control 187 Air conditioning refrigerant 451 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure AIRSCARF neck level heating Seats 105 457 Alarm system see Anti theft systems Alignment bolt Vehicle tool kit 388 415 457 77 457 Anticorrosion antifreeze 454 Antilock brake system see ABS Anti theft systems 87 Alarm system 87 Immobilizer 87 Tow away alarm 88 Ashtray 269 Aspect ratio 344 AUDIO menu Control system 129 Audio system 203 Audio and telephone operation 203 CD changer 223 CD operation 219 Introduction to satellite radio USA only 214 MP3 220 Operating and display elements 204 Auto dimming for re
340. on on the instru ment cluster gt page 24 for approxi mately 3 seconds The request to press the reset button once more to confirm ap pears in the multifunction display settings Reset to factory settings To confirm press reset button P54 32 2840 31 gt Press the reset button again The functions of all submenus will be reset to the factory settings The message Reset to factory settings appears in the multifunction display For safety reasons the following func tion cannot be reset while driving e the function Lamp circuit head lamp mode in the Lighting sub menu The following message appears in the multifunction display Lighting Cannot be completely re set to factory settings while driv ing Your individual settings will not be re set unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button again After 5 seconds the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button a In the multifunction display you see the collection of the submenus fy Settings Instr cluster P54 32 2801 31 Press button EEJ The selection marker moves to the next submenu Controls in detail Control system The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll up with button E9 and scroll down with button EE With the selection marker on the desired submenu use the IEA button to access the individual functions within
341. on is switched off When you start the RPT function the RDM function is automatically switched off e Switching on repeat gt Press RPT soft key RPT appears in the display e Switching off repeat gt Press RPT soft key again Pause function Track and time display The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone gt page 235 e Switching on pause function T PB2 60 4557 31 CHi gt Press T soft key The number of the track being played FDH FFT sc and the elapsed playing time appear in PA2 60 4556 31 the display gt Press E button gt Press T soft key again The CD changer mode is The total number of tracks and the total interrupted and PAUSE appears in playing time of the CD appear in the the display display e Switching off pause function gt Press T soft key gt Press E button The standard CD playback menu The CD changer mode is active I again Controls in detail Audio system GSM network phones Using your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display Controls in detail Audio system A A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use
342. onal repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle doors etc Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every en gine cleaning Before applying all control linkage bushings and joints should be lu bricated The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax Operation Vehicle care Vehicle washing In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible Hand wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight Use only a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo gt Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake gt Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently gt Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Operation Vehicle care Automatic car wash i Ornamental moldings You can have your car washed in an auto After running the vehicle through an au For regular cleaning and care of very dirty matic car wash from the start Automatic tomatic car wash wipe any wax off of chrome plated parts use a chrome clean
343. ont fog lamps gt page 114 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to sec ond stop The rear fog lamp switches on The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 110 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp switches off The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out The front fog lamps remain lit Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column C High beam 2 High beam flasher High beam gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position or BGR gt page 110 gt Push the combination switch in direc tion of arrow Q to switch on the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 gt Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster goes out High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 Corner illuminating front fog lamps SLK 280 SLK 350 with Bi Xenon headlamps and without Sport Package The corner illuminating front fog lamps im prove illumination of the road onto which you are turning The corner illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with e the exterior lamp switch in position gt page 110 or the ex
344. or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Controls in detail Useful features Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement gt Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Connecting call ap pears in the multifunction display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature The remote door unlock feature is avail able if the relevant cellular phone net work is available The SOS button will flash and the mes sage Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 second
345. ot possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 320 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake discs i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure Operation Tires and wheels A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Warning Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see the Practical hints section gt page 388 and gt page 408 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service includes e Checking anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Adding of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windsh
346. ou engage reverse gear R You can switch the parking position fea ture on and off via the control system gt page 148 For information on activating the parking position feature see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 175 The switches are located on the lower part of the center console 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror switch 2 Adjustment switch 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror switch Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Press switch 8 to select the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror Adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror with adjustment switch 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb Press memory button M gt page 107 Within 3 seconds press adjustment switch 2 forward backward left or right The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move If the mirror does move repeat the above steps After the setting is stored you can move the mirror again Controls in detail Memory function Controls in detail Lighting For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch WJ off headlamps and use the turn signals see Daytime running lamp mode Switching on headlamps gt page 55 The exterior lamp switch is located on the gt page 112 6 i h l and Turn signals gt page 55 dashboard to the left of the steering whee IZ Automatic headl
347. patible Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation sys tem The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of protecting the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of special child seats Warning A N When using a BabySmart compatible child seat on the passenger seat the front pas senger air bag will not deploy only if the indicator lamp remains illumi nated Please be sure to check the indicator lamp every time you use the special system child seat Should the indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed please check instal lation If the indicator lamp re mains out do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the pas senger seat until the system has been re paired Warning A N Do not place powered on laptops cell phones electronic tags such as those used in ski passes and like electronic devices on the passenger seat Signals from such de vices may interfere with the BabySmart system Such signal interference for exam ple may cause the indicator lamp not to come on during self test or be continuously lit indicating that the system is not functioning Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety and Security
348. perator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Introduction Operator s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our ee European Delivery Program For details If you plan to operate your vehicle in for consult an authorized Mercedes Benz eign countries please be aware that Center or write to e service facilities or replacement parts In the USA may not be readily available Mercedes Benz USA LLC e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat European Delivery Department alytic converters may not be available One Mercedes Drive the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale NJ 07645 0350 catalysts y In Canada e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color _ ons At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the contro
349. position and program mode C S or M C S appear in the multifunction display Warning A N It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty When the gear selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secu
350. pping tracks forward gt Press 3J button briefly The next track will be played Skipping tracks backward gt Press IJ button briefly If the track has been playing for more than 10 seconds the unit skips back to the beginning of the track currently playing If less than 10 seconds have been played the unit skips back to the beginning of the previous track Pressing the EEJ or E button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being skipped Controls in detail Audio system Fast forward reverse e Fast forward gt Press and hold ESM button until desired point has been reached e Reverse gt Press and hold EEJ button until desired point has been reached The track number and the relative time of the track is shown in the display during the search Scan e Starting scan gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approx 8 seconds in as cending order e Ending scan gt Press SC soft key or EEJ or ESM Random play The random function RDM plays the tracks of the current CD in random order When you start the RDM function the RPT function is automatically switched off e Switching on random gt Press RDM soft key RDM appears in the display A randomly selected track is played e Switching off random gt Press RDM soft key again Repeat The track being played is repeated until the repeat functi
351. program category list The category list contains all currently receivable categories of programs It is arranged alphabetically Selecting a category gt Press PTY soft key P82 60 4462 31 The current PTY category of the station is displayed gt Press lt lt lt or gt gt gt soft key This switches between the individual categories When changing the category the channel selected last in the new category becomes audible or The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category Otherwise the currently selected station remains tuned Tuning a station within the selected category The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged numerically Only one entry is visible at a time gt Press EJ or E39 button briefly The next station within the category is started gt Press and hold BEER oor EES button for approx 3 seconds until desired station has been reached Controls in detail Audio system Tuning via scan search Scan search is characterized as follows Scan search plays a channel for approx 8 seconds and then skips to the next channel within the current cat egory Scan search can be terminated manually Press SC soft key The search starts SC appears in the display Press SC soft key again The search stops Controls in detail Audi
352. r air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile 1 6 km Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GWV must never exceed the GWVR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicl
353. r passenger to fasten your seat belt If after these 6 seconds the driver s or the passenger s seat belt with the passenger seat occupied are not fastened with all doors closed e and the vehicle speed does not exceed 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale remains illuminated for as long as either the driver s or passen ger s seat belt is not fastened Safety and Security Occupant safety e andthe vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity until both the driver s and passenger s seat belt are fastened or for a maximum of 60 seconds from the time the vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph 25 km h if either the driver s or passenger s seat belt remains unfastened If the drivers or passenger s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds the seat belt telltale stops flash ing and the warning chime stops sounding The seat belt telltale then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver s or passen ger s seat belt are not fastened The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver s and passenger s seat belt with the passenger seat occupied are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a door is opened Safety and Security Occupant safety Always wear your seat belt All vehicle oc cupants always need to have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly In ad
354. r programming informa tion a P68 05 2108 31 Overhead control panel with integrated re mote control Indicator lamp Signal transmitter button Needed for programming not part of vehi cle equipment Hand held remote control of ga rage door opener gate operator or other device 6 Hand held remote control but ton Controls in detail Useful features A Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Warning Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards gt gt b gt Controls in detail Useful features When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause uncons
355. r respective Please refer to the Factory Approved lubricants must match Therefore onlyuse Service Products pamphlet or inquire at products tested and approved by your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Mercedes Benz Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter SLK 280 SLK 350 8 5 US gt 8 0 I Approved engine oils SLK 55 AMG 8 5 US qt 8 0 Automatic transmission SLK 280 SLK 350 10 4 US qt 9 8 MB Automatic Transmission Fluid SLK 55 AMG 10 4 US qt 9 8 Manual transmission SLK 280 SLK 350 1 6 US gt 1 5 1 MB Manual Transmission Oil Rear axle SLK 280 1 1 US qt 1 0 1 Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 SLK 350 1 2 US gt 1 11 SLK 55 AMG 1 3 US gt 1 2 1 Power steering SLK 280 SLK 350 1 1 US qt 1 0 I MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S SLK 55 AMG 1 1 US gt 1 0 Front wheel hubs approx 2 1 oz 60 g each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system 0 5 US qt 0 5 MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Model Capacity Cooling system SLK 280 approx 10 4 US qt 9 8 1 SLK 350 approx 11 2 US qt 10 2 I SLK 55 AMG approx 11 7 US qt 11 1 I Fuel tank SLK 280 SLK 350 approx 18 5 US gal 70 0 I including a reserve of approx 2 4 US gal 9 0 I SLK 55 AMG approx 18 5 US gal 70 0 I approx 2 6 US gal 10 0 Air conditioning system Hydraulic system for 0 19 US qt 0 18 I retractable hardtop Windshield washer 7 4 US qt 7 0 I sys
356. r the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B can be found on the driver s door B pillar This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle The Certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle 1 Driver s door B pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehi cle Tire and Loading Information Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake
357. rcedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section gt page 9 1 will provide you with further information The correspond ing page references are located at the end of each segment Unlocking with the SmartKey gt Press unlock button on the SmartKey All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed gt Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch P80 35 2086 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Unlock button for trunk lid 3 Unlock button 4 Panic button gt page 80 Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the win dows are covered with ice As a result you may no longer be able to properly close the door Do not attempt to force the door shut Doing so may damage the door or the side window Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door Getting started Unlocking Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed the SmartKey signaling range is consider ably reduced Hold the SmartKey in close proximity to
358. re ALoratic B children unattended in the vehicle or with transmission to operate within access to an unlocked vehicle Children Gear selector lever gt page 164 could move the gear selector lever from Ji Warning A N ve l You can limit the gear range by pressing position P which could result in an accident A the gear selector lever to the left D and i and or serious personal injury Getting out of your vehicle with the gear reverse the gear range limit by pressing selector lever not fully engaged in position P the gear selector lever to the right D is dangerous Also position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people Steering wheel gearshift control gt page 165 You can limit the gear range by pressing or objects J the respective downshift button on the Always set the parking brake in addition to steering wheel gearshift control and shifting to position P gt page 52 When reverse the gear range limit by pressing parked on an incline turn the front wheels the respective upshift button on the towards the road curb steering wheel gearshift control Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display gt page 158 If you pr
359. re the vehicle Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in position P If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P gt page 396 Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically All forward gears are available Controls in detail Automatic transmission Hi Coasting the vehicle or driving for any SEMI A other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage Gear ranges EEE With the gear selector lever in position D When leaving the vehicle always remove the and driving in the automatic shift SmartKey from the starter switch take it TAAT IS MOE Coveted Dy wie with ae lock the tee Do not eae nes heii p iio Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty tee j P Select a sear range To
360. rely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause uncon sciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open Getting started Driving Manual transmission Starting Automatic transmission gt Depress brake pedal gt Make sure the gearshift lever is in neu tral position no gear selected gt Fully depress clutch pedal Otherwise the engine cannot be start ed due to the integrated safety inter lock gt Do not depress accelerator Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission Gearshift pattern for manual transmission Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch For more information see Manual trans to position 3 gt page 36 and hold until 7 mission gt page 155 the engine starts P ins position with gear selector lever Oc For information on turning off the engine R Reverse gear see Turning off eng
361. remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Exit the vehicle and close all doors Press the lock button on the SmartKey gt page 34 With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed now gt page 87 Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed the SmartKey signaling range is consider ably reduced Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 92 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts e Emergency tensioning device ETD e Airbags e Child seats e Child seat recognition As independent systems their protective effects work in conjunction with each other For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and re straint systems for infants and chil dren s
362. ries designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12V power outlets gt page 271 in your ve hicle whenever possible Power outlet A power outlet Q is located in the passen ger footwell on the side panel of the center console gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Flip up cover of power outlet Q and in sert electrical plug cigarette lighter type The power outlet can be used to ac commodate 12V DC electrical asses sories e g air pump auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 180 W Floormat driver s side only Removing gt Pull floormat off of retainer pins in direction of arrow Q gt Remove the floormat Controls in detail Useful features Installing gt Lay down the floormat gt Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto re tainer pins G in direction of arrow Controls in detail Useful features Warning A N Whenever you are using floormats make sure there is enough clearance and the floormats are securely fastened Floormats should always be securely fas tened using eyelets and retainer pins Before driving off check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if nec essary A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals For easier removing and installing the floormat slide the drivers seat fully backwards gt page 38 Telephone Warning A N
363. ries can be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left hand corner of the display The following abbreviations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobile phone HOM Home WOR Work FAX Fax PAG Pager TEL Main gt When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display Returning calls received CLER MUM RCU P82 60 4467 31 Controls in detail Audio system Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or BA The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Controls in detail Audio system Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons Jj to QM on the radio head unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE briefly gt Press button The call will be made Tur
364. rising from returning to the pre set speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others gt Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 gt page 261 The cruise control resumes the last set speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The last set speed appears in the multi function display Y Loading Roof rack This vehicle is not designed to carry items on its roof Roof rails and any roof mounted devices unless express ly approved by Mercedes Benz for use on this vehicle model must not be used as they will damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop At time of printing Mercedes Benz does not offer any roof racks or any other roof mounted devices for use on this vehicle Controls in detail Loading This vehicle is not designed to carry any items on its trunk lid or accommo date any type of trunk lid rack or de vice Using such devices may damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop mechanism Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments A To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk if possible Do not place anything on shelf behind the roll bars Warning Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob jects Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown aro
365. rmation on to the Response Center Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center Controls in detail Useful features Warning A N If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds Should this occur assistance must be sum moned by other means 1 Cover 2 SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover opens gt Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 flashes until the emergency call is con cluded gt Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center gt Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded Warning A N If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle ve hicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they re ceive
366. rol system The air in the vehi cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu midified gt Press button gt page 192 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button gt page 192 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control Residual heat and ventilation Activating gt Switch off the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button GESY gt page 192 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The display in the automatic climate control panel remains switched i off How long the system will provide heating depends on With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine e the coolant temperature e the temperature set by the operator The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air volume control setting Deactivating gt Press button GESY gt page 192 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off e when the ignition is switched on gt page 36 e after about 30 minutes e if the battery voltage drops Vv Audio system Audio and telephone operation Thes
367. rom being overheated O Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Warning A N Operation Tires and wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Operation Tires and wheels Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex
368. ront lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W gt page 110 gt Open the hood gt page 307 Pit 35 2053 31 1 Housing cover for low beam halogen headlamps only Housing cover for Bi Xenon head lamps Do not remove 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for high beam high beam flasher lamp 4 Bulb socket for parking and standing light lamp Practical hints Replacing bulbs Warning A N Do not remove the cover Q for the Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high volt age in Bi Xenon lamps it is dangerous to re place the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician PS4 495 2054 31 Bulb socket for low beam bulb Halogen headlamps only Practical hints Replacing bulbs Low beam bulb Halogen headlamps only gt Turn housing cover 1 counterclock wise and remove Turn bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove Pull the bulb out of bulb socket G Press the new bulb into bulb socket G Place bulb socket G back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Reinstall housing cover Q High beam high beam flasher bulb Halogen headlamps High beam flasher bulb Bi Xenon headlamps gt Turn bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove Pull the bulb out of bulb socket
369. roperly installed towing eye bolt Never attach a tow cable tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis frame or Suspension parts Practical hints Towing the vehicle I The gear selector lever will remain locked in position P vehicles with au tomatic transmission and the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged See notes on the battery gt page 421 or on jump starting gt page 424 Vehicles with automatic transmission For information on manual unlocking of gear selector lever see gt page 396 Installing towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the ve hicle tool kit located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor gt page 388 The towing eyes are located on the passen ger side in the front and rear bumper gt Take vehicle tool kit out of trunk gt page 388 Front cover PBS 20 2451 31 1 Cover in front bumper Removing gt gt Press mark on cover Q Cover Q springs open at the top right corner Pull at the protruding part of cover and fold cover down to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eye bolt Do not disconnect cover Q from its check strap Screw towing eye bolt in to its end stop and tighten with lug wrench gt Installing Unscrew the towing eye bolt using the lug wrench To reinstall cover tilt the marked lower left corner towards the opening Maintaini
370. rse influences Operation Vehicle care More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment Is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others ap plied later Operation Vehicle care We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au thorized Mercedes B
371. rts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture 1 DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Operation Tires and wheels DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol Q gt page 339 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transportation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 339 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 317 Tire size The code 3 gt page 339 indicates the tire size Operation Tires and wheels Tire type code The code gt page 339 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Date of manufacture The date of manufacture gt page 339 identifie
372. s and wheels Important guidelines e Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make e Tires must be of the correct size for the rim e Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds e Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss or damage the tire beads e If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as re quired e Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under Ne in 3 mm e When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Operation Tires and wheels Tire care and maintenance Warning VAN Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pres sure gt page 327 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 319
373. s before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk handle again Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered inci dent report Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is lo cated the Response Center will con tact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be pro vided to law enforcement When the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call is initiated automat ically to the Response Center See anti theft alarm system gt page 87 and tow away alarm gt page 88 Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to re place up to three hand held remote con trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or oth er devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions fo
374. s is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 68 and gt page 71 gt With a smooth motion pull the belt from the belt outlet gt Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips gt Push latch plate 2 into buckle until it engages gt If necessary tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up For more information see Safety guide lines for the seat belt emergency tension ing device and air b
375. s not com pletely open or close the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered e after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on e after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the hardtop is lowered a warning will sound In the multifunction dis play you will see and the message Retractable roof being opened e Properly lock retractable hardtop before continuing to drive gt page 252 Warning A N Manually closing the retractable hardtop is a complicated and technically demanding pro cedure and should only be performed by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or quali fied technician Attempting to manually close the retractable hardtop may cause damage to the retractable hardtop and or personal injury Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Warning A N To prevent possible accidents drive the ve hicle only with the retractable hardtop either completely closed and locked or fully low ered into its storage compartment Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Keep the batteries out of reach of children If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials
376. s not transmitted with the call CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Muting a call It is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Controls in detail Audio system Talking with two callers at the same time If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call you can accept or place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that the feature described here is dependent on availability from your mobile phone service provider e Placing accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering telephone number manually gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold or gt Press button to accept a second call Controls in detail Audio system You will be notified of the second call acoustically but you will not see this in the display Combining two calls gt Press EEN and buttons The calls are combined into one call e Terminating a combined call gt Press button You are connected with the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Swit
377. s released Take off fuel filler cap and set it in di rection of arrow 2 inthe recess onthe inside of fuel filler flap To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or over fill Warning A N Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump noz zle which could cause personal injury gt Replace the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages Close the fuel filler flap Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the R malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the mE malfunction in dicator lamp Canada only to illumi nate For more information see Practical hints gt page 364 Operation At the gas station Check regularly and before a long trip Engine compartment SLK 350 example 1 Windshield washer system and head lamp cleaning system reservoir 2 Brake fluid reservoir 3 Coolant expansion tank For opening the hood see Hood gt page 307 Operation At the gas station Windshield washer system and head lamp cleaning system For information on refilling the reservoir see Windshield washer system and hea
378. s standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can op erate it using the control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a call at any time In the multifunction display you will see the message TEL Incoming Call o P54 32 2809 31 Audio system TEL Call cs P54 32 2610 31 COMAND gt Press button F You have answered the call The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display Rejecting a call If you do not wish to receive the call you can choose to reject it gt Press button Fam You have rejected the call The caller receives a busy signal Ending a call gt Press button Fam You have ended the call The standby message appears in the multifunction display Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu and the standby message in the multifunction display gt Press button EAN or Re The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take up to 30 seconds In the multifunction display you will see the message Please wait When the message Please wait disap pears the phone book has been load ed Press button J or Ref repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display
379. s the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with O1 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Maximum tire load 1 Maximum tire load rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Warning For more information on tire load rating gt page 335 For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities gt page 323 Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 327 for proper tire inflation Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adverse Q Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy and are pressure more likely to fail f
380. s under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or 366 0123 in Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor ve hicle safety from the Hotline Introduction Vehicle data recording Y Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve v
381. s will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 88 and the automatic central locking gt page 101 necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission however we recommend the drive shaft be dis connected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage position O or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the gear selector lever must be in position N manual trans mission gear shift lever in neutral posi tion and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 1 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for dis tances up to 30 miles 50 km and ata speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Warning A N If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power sup ply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately con trol the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make
382. sdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Controls in detail Control system Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on gt Switch on the telephone and Audio or COMAND See separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Which messages will appear in the multi function display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off e fthe telephone is switched off the message in the multifunction display is PHONE off e lf the telephone is switched on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the multi function display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network Ready is indicated in the mul tifunction display TEL Ready P54 32 2761 31 Thi
383. sions of the spare wheel with col vm lapsible tire are different from those of the e Do not exceed a vehicle speed of road wheels As a result the vehicle han 90 mph 80 km h dling characteristics change when driving e Drive to the nearest tire repair facility with a spare wheel with collapsible tire to have the flat tire repaired or mounted replaced as appropriate The spare wheel with collapsible tire should e Do not operate vehicle with more than only be used temporarily and should be re one spare wheel with collapsible tire P40 10 3165 31 placed with a regular road wheel as quickly mounted Wheel bolt for light alloy rims as possible For more information see Rims and tires 2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with gt page 439 collapsible tire located under plastic cover on the outside of spare wheel rim H Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the spare wheel with collapsible tire The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle s brakes Warning A N Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired Practical hints Where will I find Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey open the driver s door and the trunk using the mechanical key
384. so regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C 5 4 US gt 5 1 I 5 9 US qt 5 5 I Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc 49 F 45 C 6 0 US gt 5 61 6 4 US qt 6 11 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield washer system and head Both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system are sup plied from the windshield washer fluid res ervolr The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7 4 US qt 7 0 I gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water or concentrate and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Warning A N Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water e part S to100 parts water 40 ml 1 34 fl oz S to 1 gallon 4 I water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixe
385. spare wheel with collapsible tire The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle s brakes Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub To avoid paint damage place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while in stalling first wheel bolt Warning A N Always replace wheel bolts that are dam aged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts Damaged wheel hub threads should be re paired immediately Do not continue to drive under these circumstances Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off This could cause an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts P40 10 3493 31 Guide the spare wheel onto the align ment bolt and push it on Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them slightly Practical hints Flat tire Inflating the collapsible tire Warning Use only genuine equipment Warning AN Mercedes Benz wheel bolts Other wheel Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is bolts may come loose properly mounted Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump gt page 388 before lowering the ve hicle P40 10 3298 31 gt Unscrew the alignment b
386. ssee 98 Closing the trunk cccceeeceeeeees 99 Trunk lid emergency release 100 Automatic central locking 101 Locking and unlocking from the inside es ncsessisrctacbuctanenenmeestotaecs 102 Ea N ENEE aed nee uae ceed secu 104 Seat heating cccssesccesseeeeees 104 AIRSCARF neck level heating 105 Memory fUNCtION ceeeeeecseeeeeeeees 107 Storing positions into memory 108 Recalling positions from memory 108 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position parking aid 108 LTE PILLS eserken eere EE 110 Exterior lamp switch 066 110 Combination switch s es 114 Corner illuminating front fog lamps SLK 280 SLK 350 with Bi Xenon headlamps and without Sport Package cceeecceeeeeeeees 115 Hazard warning flasher 117 Interior lighting cece eeeeeee eens 117 Door entry lamps cceeeeeeee eee 119 Instrument Cluster ssccceneeees 120 Instrument cluster illumination 120 TACNOMELtET csescccceeseccecessscees 121 Outside temperature indicator 121 Trip odometer cccseeceeseeeees 122 IOC EE A 122 Control system scccncetiadesecserviarteniecoeses 123 Multifunction display 006 123 Multifunction steering wheel 124 WIG US isxtsssmcowssieoasacecacencesedeieatoaaeeses 126 Standard display menu 128 AUDIO MeNU cccseeeeereeeeees 1
387. ssion which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the programming procedures replace step 4 with the following Step 4 gt Press and hold the signal transmitter button or Do not release this button until it has been successful ly trained gt While still holding down the signal transmitter button or cycle your hand held remote control button 6 as follows Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds then release it for 2 seconds and again press and hold it for 2 seconds Repeat this se quence on the hand held remote con trol until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training the indicator lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds gt Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control make sure you retain the hand held remote con trol that came with the garage door opener gate operator or other device You may need it for use in other vehi cles for future programming of an integrated remote control or simply for continued use as a hand held remote control to operate the resp
388. stant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pul sation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica tion of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal A The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af forded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeop ardize the user s safety or the safety of others Warning For more information see Practical Hints gt page 362 Safety and Security Driving safety systems BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the br
389. sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position O for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the steering is locked To unlock re move SmartKey from starter switch and re insert Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Adapt your driving accordingly To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use switch on ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the haz ard warning flasher will operate again Practical hints Towing the vehicle When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the follow ing With the automatic central locking acti vated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx 9 mph 15 km h or more To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic cen tral locking gt page 101 Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 88 The vehicle should only be towed using a p
390. t After correct telephone number has been entered press button If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the telephone book the name will appear in the display Phone book The numbers stored in the phone book of the telephone can be called up either by name or number In addition incoming calls are stored in the phone book CLK This is only possible however when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book Searching and calling up telephone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone s phone book using the audio system You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book H OM ROU Pe2 60 4559 31 or or Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press desired numerical key to ES The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Schneider press button four times Press and hold button W or BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button WW or B until desired initial letter has been reached gt Press button WW or Bg repeatedly until desired entry has been reached The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub entries Several sub ent
391. t manual 1 Adjustment handle gt To unlock the steering column pull handle out to its stop limit gt Move the steering wheel to the desired position gt Push handle Q back to its original po sition to relock the steering column When you hear an audible click the steering column is again fixed into place Make sure the steering column is se curely locked by trying to move the steering wheel up and down in and out before driving off Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering column Warning A N Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehi cle at a standstill and make sure the steer ing column is securely locked in place before driving off Driving without the steering column locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move it up and down and in and out be fore driving off Steering wheel adjustment electrical Q The memory function gt page 107 lets you store the settings for the steer ing wheel together with the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors and the driver s seat position The lever for the electrical steering wheel adjustment is located on the steering col umn lower left Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move the lever in direction of arrows 1 until a comfortable steering wheel
392. t ventilate the interior before driving off The cli mate control will then adjust the interi or temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris When the retractable hardtop is closed do not obstruct air flow by placing ob jects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear window Switching climate control system on off Switching on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Set air volume control 2 to any speed gt page 179 The previous settings are once again in effect Switching off gt Set airvolume control 2 gt page 179 to position O When the climate control system is switched off the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up Setting the temperature Use temperature controls and gt page 179 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Controls in detail Climate control Increasing gt Turn temperature control 1 and or gt page 179 slightly clockwise The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature D
393. t in which the emer gency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See gt page 276 for instruc tions on initiating an emergency call man ually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the con nection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunc tion display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the ve hicle determined by the GPS satellite loca tion system vehicle model identification number and color are generated Controls in detail Useful features A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated The Response Center will attempt to deter mine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if e jit has been activated and is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time e the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the info
394. ted program mode M C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 158 I For information on automatic program modes C or S see Automatic shift program gt page 163 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting gt page 164 and Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshift ing gt page 165 Activating manual shift program gt Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the M for manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display The transmission switches to the manual program mode M Automatic shifting is switched off The gear range is not limited You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D You can upshift or downshift through the gears in Succession The manual program mode M will not be stored When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode M selected the transmission will go to the automatic program mode C or S when the engine is restarted Upshifting B In the manual program mode M the transmission will not upshift even if the engine has reached its overrevving range Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Briefly
395. tem and headlamp cleaning system Fuels coolants lubricants etc MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze Agent Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum posted Octane 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Hydraulic Fluid MB Windshield washer concentrate 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 456 Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their Suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters re quired for vehicles with Maintenance system U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Cana da vehicles For a listing of approved en gine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of spec ification other than those expressly re quired for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty P
396. tem is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services Is available to yOu For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for approx 10 seconds during the sys tem self check after switching on igni tion together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Pig See System self check gt page 274 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than ap proximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not avail able The message Call failed ap pears in the multifunction display Information
397. terior lamp switch in position R gt page 110 or e the daytime running lamp mode activated gt page 112 Controls in detail Lighting Corner illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions The corner illuminating front fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph 40 km h Driving forward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Depending on whether you are turning left or right switch on the left or right turn signal gt page 55 The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the road onto which you are turning gt D Controls in detail Lighting The respective corner illuminating front fog lamp will stay lit until you switch off the turn signal even if the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position The respective corner illuminating front fog lamp may stay on for a brief period after the turn signal is switched off The respective corner illuminating front fog lamp stays on for a maximum of 3 minutes After that period it will go out even if the turn signal is still on The corner illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steering angle even if you did not switch on either turn signal If the corner illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle Switching off corner ill
398. th a BabySmart child seat If the passenger front air bag off indicator properly installed on lamp remains out the passenger seat gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages ap pear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system gt page 132 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 24 or button EAN Red z or on the steering wheel Other high priority messages and messag es of less immediate priority regular dis play colors can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 24 or button BY ed mz or on the steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 132 Re m
399. that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling When inserting the batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint When replacing batteries always re place both batteries The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries SmartKey b Insert mechanical key C in direction gt Using a lint free cloth insert new p of arrow in side opening batteries under contact spring Replacement batteries Lithium type i iti i i p yp gt Using mechanical key push gray with the positive terminal facing up CR 2025 or equivalent slide 2 to unlatch battery gt Return battery compartment 2 into gt Remove mechanical key Q compartment the housing until it locks into place 394 i i page a24 gt Pullbattery compartment outofthe Slide mechanical key Q back into the housing in direction of arrow SmartKey gt Remove the discharged batteries in di gt Check the operation of the SmartKey rection of arrow P80 35 2238 31 1 Mechanical key 2 Slide 3 Battery compartment P80 35 2239 31 4 Battery Contact spring Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is t
400. that sub menu Once within the submenu you can use the EAN button to move to the next function or the RY button to move to the previous function within that submenu The settings themselves are made with button or Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can Detailed instructions on making individual be changed within the various submenus settings can be found on the following pages Instrument cluster Time Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience gt page 137 gt page 139 gt page 143 gt page 147 gt page 147 Selecting digital speed Time synchronization Daytime running lamp Setting automatic locking Activating ometer display mode with head unit mode USA only easy entry exit feature Selecting language Setting the time hours Locator lighting Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Selecting display speed Setting the time Night security display or outside minutes illumination temperature for status Setting the date month Interior lighting delayed indicator shut off Setting the date day Setting the date year Instrument cluster submenu Access the Instr cluster submenu via the Settings menu Use the Instr cluster submenu to change the instru ment cluster display settings The follow ing functions are available Function Page Selecting speedometer display 137 mode Selecting language 137 Selecting display speed display 1
401. the automatic program mode C or S The manual program mode M is not stored Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the trans mission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated vv iv Stop the vehicle Move gear selector lever to P Turn off the engine Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting Restart the engine Move gear selector lever to position D for second gear or R Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Y Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers see gt page 56 Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard 1 Headlamp cleaning button gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button Q The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have e switched on the headlamps and e operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid 15 times When you switch off ignition the counter resets For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 315 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear view mirrors For more information on setting t
402. the signal transmit ter button is programmed If this button has already been programmed the in dicator lamp will only start flashing af ter 20 seconds Step 5 gt After the indicator lamp Q changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter but ton If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button or 4 is pressed and re leased If the indicator lamp flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns toa constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Controls in detail Useful features Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the Step 6 training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting butto
403. the tele phone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic con ditions permit Warning Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the display When you insert your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone into the telephone cradle you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 231 This display disappears when you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If the telephone was previously switched off PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN Switching off the telephone gt Press button for approx 3 seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the
404. the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water Warning A N Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward during parking maneu vers to the stored position The switches are located on the lower part of the center console 1 Driver side exterior rear view mirror 2 Adjustment switch 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Store a parking position for the pas senger side exterior rear view mirror gt page 108 Switch the Mirror adjustment Parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system to ON gt page 148 Press switch 3 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror Shift into reverse gear R The passenger side exterior rear view mirror turns downwards to the stored position Controls in detail Good visibility The passenger side exterior rear view mir ror returns to its previously stored driving position e 10
405. tion gt page 137 gt Press knob briefly The instrument cluster illumination dims Tachometer E The red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 denotes excessive engine speed Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious en gine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Outside temperature indicator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is displayed in the multifunction display gt page 129 Controls in detail Instrument cluster The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving There fore the accuracy of the displayed temper ature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displ
406. tion display gt page 368 normally but without the ABS avail abl gt Have the system checked at an autho e rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon If the ABS control unit is malfunction as possible ing other systems such as the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident The charging voltage has fallen below gt Switch off electrical consumers that 10 volts and the ABS has switched off are currently not needed e g seat heating The battery might not be charged suf gt ficiently If necessary have the generator and battery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ABS Is operational again Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only The red brake warning You are driving with the parking brake gt Release the parking brake OW Canada only lamp comes on while driv set gt page 52 ing and you hear a warning sound The red brake warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the gt Risk of accident Carefully stop the lamp comes on while driv reservoir vehicle and notify an authorized ing Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Eg SELLE A If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickn
407. tion had been selected previously P82 60 4460 31 The first channel 001 is called up and the PTY system changes to All categories If no station can be received ACQUIRING appears in the display If the Satellite radio service is not activated ACQUIRING will also appear in the radio display and NO SAT will appear in the multifunction display Controls in detail Audio system Selecting a station Accessing via number keys The following options are available gt e Selecting a station using the selected category gt page 217 e Tuning via station presets gt page 216 e Tuning via scan search gt page 217 e Tuning via manual channel input gt page 216 e Tuning via the program category list gt page 216 Tuning via station presets Ten satellite radio station presets are available You can access the presets via number keys Enter number of preset you wish to select e g RM The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function changes to the category corresponding to the station Tuning via manual channel input P82 60 4461 31 Example tuning in channel 16 gt Press EJ Input line appears in the main radio menu gt Use number keys to enter desired channel within 8 seconds e g i a The system tunes to channel 16 The station you have selected begins to play You can only enter available channel numbers Tuning via the
408. tions installed in your vehi cle Introduction Symbols Y Symbols Trademarks The following symbols are found in this gt This symbol points to instructions for e ESP is a registered trademark of SPECO Ea en DaimlerChrysler Optional equipment is identified gt Anumber of these symbols appearing HomeLink is a registered trademark with an asterisk Since standard in succession indicates a multiple step of Princesa Johnson Control equipment varies between models procedure the descriptions and illustrations in Company gt Page This symbol tells you where to ove Die ama MAY OISE SUEN ION i look a further i a ona e BabySmart is a trademark of the actual equipment of your one Siemens Automotive Corp vehicle pig e SIRIUS and related marks are trade le MIS cot Reon Smolen n an interrupted procedure which marks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc Warning A N E caueaeyt page Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life a In the glossary of technical or the health or life of others terms this symbol is used to in dicate cross references to term T definitions Highlights hazards that may result in Display Words appearing in the multi damage to your vehicle function display are printed in the type shown here Helpful hints or further information you may find useful Introduction Operating safety A Work improperly carried out on electronic components
409. tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver s door B pillar for normal driving conditions Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Operation Tires and wheels TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tr
410. tires installed as original equipment Placard Example B may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads Important notes on tire inflation pressure A If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops Warning e Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in flation pressure If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condi tion If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the in side of the fuel filler flap Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure w
411. to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations e If you have changed the tire inflation pressure e lf you have replaced the wheels or tires e If you have installed new wheels or tires gt Using the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the inside of the fuel filler flap make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is cor rect Warning A N The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set the system will monitor the pressure ac cording to the incorrect value Operation Tires and wheels Switch on the ignition gt page 36 The standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 128 Press button BVA or aN repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator active Reactivation poss Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pres now OK Operation Tires and w
412. ton Q on the left side of the steering wheel The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG In addition to the automatic shift program C or S your vehicle is equipped with the manual shift program M In the manual program mode M system controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshift ing using the steering wheel gearshift but tons to the left and right of the steering wheel gt page 167 or the gear selector lever Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail Automatic transmission The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console 1 Program mode selector switch M Manual For manual gear shifting C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving Controls in detail Automatic transmission The current gear selector lever position and the selec
413. tries the reproduction of copyrighted materials is not permitted even if only for personal use without the express prior consent of the copyright holder Please check the current copyright laws for your country and comply with them These restrictions do not apply for exam ple to your own compositions and record ings or for recordings for which authorization has been obtained from the copyright holder Controls in detail Audio system MP3 playback You can play an MP3 CD on the CD changer as you would any standard audio CD All of the functions described for the CD changer also apply for the playback of MP3 CDs Keep in mind that the single CD player in the audio system unit is not able to read MP3 CDs The first 99 tracks on the CD including tracks in subdirectories are recognized and played Any additional tracks will not be played Due to the branched data structure playback of the first track may be de layed slightly Operating the single CD player in the audio system unit Loading a CD The single CD player in the audio system unit has capacity for one CD The CD slot for loading the drive is located underneath the soft keys gt Make sure the system is switched on gt Insert CD into CD slot The label side of the CD must face upwards The system automatically pulls the CD into the CD slot The audio CD begins to play If a CD is already loaded it must be ejected before
414. two symbols Opening the cockpit air vent and center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 190 to the first stop and turn thumbwheel 8 gt page 190 upward all the way The cockpit air vent 7 and the center air vents and 0 are open gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 190 upward all the way Only center air vents and Q are open Closing the cockpit air vent and center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 8 and gt page 190 downward The cockpit air vent and the center air vents are closed Opening and closing side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels Q and gt page 190 in the corresponding di rection Side air vents 2 and 3 are open or closed Adjusting air volume Use button BGR gt page 192 for auto matic mode or air volume control gt page 192 to adjust air volume manually Eleven blower speeds are available gt Turn air volume control 1 gt page 192 to the desired position The indicator lamp on the button Mg gt page 192 goes out The automatic operation of air volume switches off Controls in detail Automatic climate control Defrosting windshield You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the side windows a Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again Controls in detail Automatic cl
415. ty and Security Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stability Program In winter operation the maximum effectiveness of the ABS the BAS and the ESP is only achieved with winter tires gt page 348 or snow chains as required Warning A N The following factors increase the risk of accidents e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS and ESP cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the pre vailing road and weather conditions ABS Warning A N Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph 8 km h indepen dent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure The ROS indicator lamp in the speedome ter dial gt page 24 comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Braking At the in
416. ulbs License plate lamp GC 5 ARBE b E ERESSE SNERER 3 P82 10 2913 41 1 Screw Loosen both screws Q Remove the license plate lamp Replace the bulb Reinstall the license plate lamp v v vy Yy Retighten screws Q Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Removing wiper blades Warning A N For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch before replacing a wiper blade Oth erwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury B To avoid damage to the hood the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 Turn combination switch to wiper setting Il gt page 56 With wiper arms in vertical position turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage 1 Wiper blade 2 Tabs 3 Attachment 4 Cover gt Press tabs 2 together and tilt wiper blade in direction of arrow Tabs 2 on both recesses of attachment 3 are detached gt Maintaining its tilted position remove wiper blade Q out of attachment Installing wiper blades 1 Cover 2 Guide tab 3 Attachment 4 Tabs Maintaining a tilted position of the wiper blade place cover Q onto attachment 3 so that guide tab 2 is under cover 1 Tilt the wiper blade in direction of the arrow towar
417. uld slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A N Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been ap proved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY e Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident e Each occupant should wear his or her seat belt at all times because seat belts
418. uminating front fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements This will switch off the corner illuminating front fog lamps if they where activated by switching on the left or right turn signal If the turn signal should stay on after mak ing the turn the turn signal and corner illu minating front fog lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position Driving rearward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Place the gearshift lever gear selector lever in position R The inverse front fog lamp comes on automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Place the gearshift lever gear selector lever out of position R The respective front fog lamp goes out Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch The hazard warning flasher switches on au tomatically when an air bag deploys The hazard warning flasher switch is locat ed on the upper part of the center console 1 Hazard warning flasher switch Switching on hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 All turn signal lamps are flashing With the hazard warning flasher acti vated and the combination switch set for either le
419. und and injuring vehicle occupants dur ing an accident The glove box and the storage compart ment under the armrest are centrally locked and unlocked Glove box FAO 1 Glove box lid release 2 Glove box gt Pull glove box lid release 4 to open the glove box The glove box lid opens downward Push glove box lid up until it engag es to close the glove box The CD changer is located in the glove box Storage compartment and telephone compartment under armrest C Armrest 2 Recess for opening storage and telephone compartment Storage compartment gt Reach into recess 2 on the left or right side and lift armrest Q in direc tion of arrow to open the storage com partment gt Lower armrest Q until it engages to close storage compartment Telephone compartment gt Reach into recess 2 on the left or right side press in and fold up armrest to the right or left side to open it The compartment for the telephone is opened gt Fold armrest back until it engages to close the telephone compartment Storage compartment between the seat backrests 1 Storage compartment lid release 2 Storage compartment gt Press storage compartment lid release Q to open The storage compartment lid opens downward Push storage compartment lid up until it engages to close it Controls in detail Useful features Parcel net in passenger footwell
420. urround lighting in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting oe aD Function Surround lighting Off P54 32 2749 31 Press button or E to switch the locator lighting function On Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Egy when exiting the vehicle gt page 55 The locator lighting feature is activated Night security illumination Headlamps delayed shut off Use this function to set whether or not the exterior lamps illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed With the delayed shut off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position EG before the engine is turned off the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off and remain lit for approximately 15 seconds e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds You can reactivate this function within 10 minutes by opening a door gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until you see Headlamps delayed shut off in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system The selection marker is on the current setting AP Headlamps delayed shut off im o Off S P54 32 3346
421. ust have been sta tionary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off e with the engine not at operating tem perature the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display do the following gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 The standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 128 gt Press button Rg or EAN on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display gt page 124 Engine oil level Measuring now Measurement correct only if veh level ae P54 32 3342 31 One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the multifunc tion display e Engine oil level ok e Add 1 0 qt Canada 1 0 liter to reach max oil level Operation Engine compartment Add 1 5 qts Canada 1 5 liters to reach max oil level Add 2 0 qts Canada 2 0 liters to reach max oil level If you want to interrupt the checking procedure press button BVA or Ba on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 124 If necessary add engine oil For adding engine oil see Adding en gine oil gt page 312 For more information on engine oil see Fuels coolants lubricants etc gt page 449 Operation Engine compartment Other display messages If the ignition is not switched on the fol
422. uster come on The indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the re spective systems are operational Vehicles with automatic transmission The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently charged e Check the vehicle battery and charge it if necessary gt page 421 e Geta jump start gt page 424 To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge or a completely discharged vehicle battery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation For information on starting the engine see gt page 50 Getting started Unlocking Getting started Adjusting Warning A N All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically depending on the vehicle s equipment For more information see Seats gt page 104 Warning A N Do not adjust the driver seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicl
423. ution gt Switch off the headlamps gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Display symbol N g Display message Seat belt system Visit workshop Function Not available Close trunk lid Washer fluid Top up Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The seat belt system is malfunction Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center ing as soon as possible This display appears if button or on the multifunction steer ing wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone This message will appear whenever gt Close the trunk lid the trunk lid is open The fluid level in the windshield gt Add washer fluid gt page 315 washer fluid reservoir has dropped below its minimum mark Practical hints Where will I find First aid kit Removing the vehicle tool kit The first aid kit is stored in a parcel net Vehicles with spare wheel behind the driver s seat Vehicle tool kit vehicle jack The vehicle tool kit is stored in a storage compartment under the trunk floor The following is included dic ee 1 Collapsible wheel chock 2 Vehicle jack 3 Protect
424. wards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 92 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions SmartKey 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause consumers and driving position All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to see Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 362 3 Starting position an accident and or serious personal injury Starter switch 0 For removing the SmartKey The steering is locked when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch 1 Power supply for some electrical con sumers such as seat adjustment When you switch on ignition the indi cator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless acti vated in the instrument cl
425. will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the win dows are covered with ice As a result you may no longer be able to properly close the door Do not attempt to force the door shut Doing so may damage the door or the side window Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door Opening the trunk A minimum height clearance of 5 78 ft 1 76 m is required to open the trunk lid The handle is located above the rear license plate recess gt Pull on the handle gt Lift the trunk lid H When the trunk lid is lifted slightly it swings open upwards automatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance The vehicle or trunk lid must be unlocked before the trunk lid can be opened The trunk lid can only be opened when the vehicle is not in motion and the re tractable hardtop is fully opened or closed The trunk lid can also be opened from its inside in an emergency see Trunk lid emergency release gt page 100 Closing the trunk P80 20 2700 31 14 Handle gt Lower the trunk lid using handle Q gt Close the trunk lid with hands placed flat on the trunk lid Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk lid Be es pecially careful when small children are around
426. windows 248 Operating with retractable hardtop switch 248 Summer opening convenience closing 249 Synchronizing 251 Practical hints Fuses 430 Lamps in instrument cluster Spare wheel bolts 392 Towing vehicle 426 Vehicle jack 389 What to do if 362 Premium unleaded gasoline 452 Problems While driving 58 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 345 Program mode selector switch 461 Automatic transmission 163 PSI 345 362 R Radio Operation Audio system 209 Operation Control system 129 Satellite USA only 130 Radio transmitters control and Operation 301 Reading lamps 119 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 177 Recommended inflation pressure 345 Recovery services for stolen vehicle Tele Aid 280 Refrigerant Air conditioning 451 Refueling 304 Regular checks 305 Remote control see SmartKey Remote door unlock with Tele Aid 280 Reporting safety defects 18 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button Instrument cluster 25 Residual engine heat utilization see REST REST 461 Automatic climate control 202 Climate control 188 Restraint systems 461 Retractable hardtop 252 461 Locking after raising lowering 255 Opening and closing 252 Operating manually 397 Problems when operating 255 Summer opening convenience closing 257 Wind screen 259 Rims 345 439 Roadside Assistance Roll bar 462 RON 304 462 Roof rack 265 Rubber parts cleaning 359 Run Flat Indicator 329
427. work or T gt If the audio system was on as you code TDMA or CDMA network removed the SmartKey from the starter switch the audio system will automatically come back on as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 Do not press directly in the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged or gt Press button Switching off gt or gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Press button Should excessively high temperatures occur while the audio system is being operated the display will dim If tem peratures continue to rise HIGH TEMP will appear in the display after which the audio system will be switched off for a cooling down period Adjusting the volume p button Turn rotary control of The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used Adjusting sound functions The bass and treble functions are called up by pressing the button Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands weather band CD mode and telephone mode Bass gt Press button repeatedly until BASS appears in the display Controls in detail Audio system or P82 60 4450 31 Press or soft key to increase or decrease
428. y The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob jects When not in use keep the cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an acci gt Press briefly on cover plate 4 to open dent the cup holder 1 Cover plate The cup holder opens automatically gt Press cover plate G until the cup hold er engages to close it Ashtray 1 Cover plate gt Press cover plate Q briefly in the di rection of the arrow The ashtray opens automatically gt To close the ashtray again press cover plate Q until the ashtray engages R gt gt Controls in detail Useful features emoving ashtray insert Installing ashtray insert gt Place the ashtray insert into the Warning A N retainer gt Push the ashtray insert down into the Remove front ashtray only with vehicle a retainer until it engages standing still Set the parking brake to se cure vehicle from movement Move gear selector lever to position N manual trans mission into second gear With gear selec tor lever in position N manual transmission into second gear turn off the engine Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake Move the selector lever to position N manual transmission second gear Now you have more room to take out the ashtray insert Open the ashtray Reach into both recesses on the left and rig
429. y The weather band menu is called up The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display until desired waveband has been selected The FM AM and WB wavebands are called up one after another The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Direct frequency input gt page 211 Manual tuning gt page 211 Automatic seek tuning gt page 211 scan search gt page 211 Station memory gt page 212 Automatic station memory Autostore gt page 212 The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments 0 2 MHz in FM range 10 kHz in AM range Controls in detail Audio system Direct frequency input Manual tuning Scan search gt Select desired waveband gt Select desired waveband e Starting scan search gt Press EJ or button for approx gt Select desired waveband 3 seconds gt Press button repeatedly until desired frequency has been reached Step by step station tuning takes place eee ook ga in ascending or descending order Each time the button Is pressed the radio tunes further by 0 2 MHz During P82 60 4459 31 Press button Enter desired frequency with manual tuning the radio is muted gt Press SC soft key buttons J to A SC will appear in the display The Automatic seek tuning radio briefly approximately ce i 8 seconds tunes in all receivable You can only enter frequencies wit
430. y start the engine again after the mes sage disappears You could otherwise dam age the engine Add coolant gt page 313 If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with this message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major en gine damage Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message tal Display malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Doors open Possible cause consequence Certain electronic systems are un able to relay information to the con trol system The following systems may have failed e Coolant temperature display e Tachometer e Cruise control display The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning The displays for several systems have malfunctioned Some systems themselves may also have malfunc tioned You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open Possible solution gt Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center When the display is malfunctioning warnings and malfunction messages might not be dis played gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an author
431. you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices ETDs and seat belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the fol lowing cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceed ing a preset severity level e ifthe restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see EY indicator lamp gt page 64 The ETDs for the seats will only activate if the respective seat belt is fastened latch plate properly inserted into buckle In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash Warning A N An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced When scrapping the emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center

Kenwood C929 CD Player User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents